Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 452

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AV
A

B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM C

E
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 28 F

PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 28


Work Flow ................................................................28 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 30
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 9 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 30 H
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 9
AUDIO UNIT ...............................................................30
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 9
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .......................30
Precaution for Work ................................................ 10 I
DISPLAY UNIT ...........................................................30
PREPARATION ........................................... 11 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................30
PREPARATION ..................................................11 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 32 J
Special Service Tool ............................................... 11 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 11
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER... 34 K
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 12 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................12 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 36
Component Parts Location ...................................... 12 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36 L
Component Description ........................................... 12
STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 38
SYSTEM .............................................................14 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38 M
AUDIO SYSTEM ........................................................ 14 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 40
AUDIO SYSTEM : System Diagram ....................... 14
AUDIO SYSTEM : System Description ................... 14 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 40 AV
Symptom Table .......................................................40
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 15
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 42
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................15 Description ...............................................................42
O
Reference Value ..................................................... 15
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 43
DISPLAY UNIT ...................................................17 P
Reference Value ..................................................... 17 AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 43
Exploded View .........................................................43
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 18 Removal and Installation .........................................43
BASE AUDIO .....................................................18 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 45
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 18 Exploded View .........................................................45
Removal and Installation .........................................45

Revision: September 2014 AV-1 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT .................................................. 46 AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 70
Exploded View ........................................................ 46 Reference Value ..................................................... 70
Removal and Installation ........................................ 46 DTC Index ............................................................... 76

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 47 DISPLAY UNIT .................................................. 78


Exploded View ........................................................ 47 Reference Value ..................................................... 78
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .............................. 81
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER... 48 Reference Value ..................................................... 81
Removal and Installation ........................................ 48
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ...................... 83
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 49 Reference Value ..................................................... 83
Exploded View ........................................................ 49
Removal and Installation ........................................ 49 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 85
AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................. 50 MID AUDIO SYSTEM ........................................ 85
Location of Antennas .............................................. 50 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 85
Window Antenna Repair ......................................... 50
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 112
MID AUDIO
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 112
PRECAUTION ............................................. 52 Work Flow ............................................................. 112
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 52 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 114
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
SIONER" ................................................................. 52 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 114
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ............. 52 CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 114
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ........................... 52 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
Precaution for Harness Repair ............................... 52 CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ...................... 114
Precaution for Work ................................................ 53
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) .............. 114
PREPARATION ........................................... 54 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
scription ................................................................. 115
PREPARATION ................................................. 54 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Special Service Tool ............................................... 54 Procedure ............................................................. 115
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 54 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con-
figuration List ......................................................... 116
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 55
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 117
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 55
Component Parts Location ..................................... 55 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 117
Component Description .......................................... 56 DTC Logic ............................................................. 117
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 117
SYSTEM ............................................................. 57
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 118
MULTI AV SYSTEM .................................................. 57
DTC Logic ............................................................. 118
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram .................. 57
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description ............. 57 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 119
DTC Logic ............................................................. 119
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) ... 60
Description .............................................................. 60 U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 120
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 60 DTC Logic ............................................................. 120
CONSULT Function ................................................ 67
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 121
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON- DTC Logic ............................................................. 121
TROL UNIT) ....................................................... 69
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 69 U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 122
Work Flow ............................................................... 69 DTC Logic ............................................................. 122

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 70 U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 123


DTC Logic ............................................................. 123

Revision: September 2014 AV-2 2015 Pathfinder


U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 124 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 144
DTC Logic ............................................................. 124 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce- A
dure ....................................................................... 144
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 125
DTC Logic ............................................................. 125 BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ............................ 145
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro- B
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 126 cedure .................................................................... 145
DTC Logic ............................................................. 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126 A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ........................ 146 C
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 127 Procedure .............................................................. 146
DTC Logic ............................................................. 127
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 127 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 147 D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 147
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 128
DTC Logic ............................................................. 128 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER. 149
E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 149
U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 129
DTC Logic ............................................................. 129 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 151
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 151 F

U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 130 FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO
DTC Logic ............................................................. 130 SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................................ 153
G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 153
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 131
DTC Logic ............................................................. 131 SATELLITE AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT .......... 155
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 H
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 132
DTC Logic ............................................................. 132 BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..... 157
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 157
I
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 133 RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 159
DTC Logic ............................................................. 133 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 159
J
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ..................................... 134 RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............. 160
DTC Logic ............................................................. 134 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 160
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 161 K
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................. 136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 161
DTC Logic ............................................................. 136
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 136
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 162
L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162
U1263 USB ....................................................... 138
DTC Logic ............................................................. 138
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 163
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 163 M
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138

U1264 ANTENNA AMP. ................................... 139 HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-


DTC Logic ............................................................. 139 NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 164
AV
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 139 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 164

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 140 VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL


Description ............................................................ 140 CIRCUIT .......................................................... 165 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 141
DTC Logic ............................................................. 141 COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........ 166
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166 P
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 142
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 168
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 142 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 142
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 170
DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 142 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 142

Revision: September 2014 AV-3 2015 Pathfinder


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 172 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 197
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................172 Exploded View ...................................................... 197
Removal and Installation ....................................... 197
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 173
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................173 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 198
Removal and Installation ....................................... 198
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT. 175
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................175 AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................ 199
Location of Antennas ............................................ 199
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 176 Window Antenna Repair ....................................... 199
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................176
BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA ............................... 201
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 178 Removal and Installation ....................................... 201
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................178
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 202
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 179 Removal and Installation ....................................... 202
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 202
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 179
Symptom Table .....................................................179
PREMIUM AUDIO

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............. 183 PRECAUTION ........................................... 203


Description .............................................................183 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 203
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 185 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 185 SIONER" ............................................................... 203
Exploded View .......................................................185 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV
Removal and Installation .......................................185 Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ........... 203
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 203
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ................ 187 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 203
Removal and Installation .......................................187 Precaution for Work .............................................. 204
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 188 PREPARATION ......................................... 205
Exploded View .......................................................188
Removal and Installation .......................................188 PREPARATION ................................................ 205
Special Service Tool ............................................. 205
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 189 Commercial Service Tools .................................... 205
Exploded View .......................................................189
Removal and Installation .......................................189 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 206
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 190 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 206
Exploded View .......................................................190 Component Parts Location ................................... 206
Removal and Installation .......................................190 Component Description ........................................ 208

INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER. 191 SYSTEM ........................................................... 210


Removal and Installation .......................................191
MULTI AV SYSTEM ................................................ 210
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 192 MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram ................ 210
Exploded View .......................................................192 MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description ............ 210
Removal and Installation .......................................192
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) .. 216
USB INTERFACE ............................................ 193 Description ............................................................ 216
Removal and Installation .......................................193 On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 216
CONSULT Function .............................................. 226
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ................ 194
Removal and Installation .......................................194 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 228
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT ....................... 195 CONSULT Function .............................................. 228
Exploded View .......................................................195
Removal and Installation .......................................195 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 230
MICROPHONE ................................................. 196 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 230
Removal and Installation .......................................196 Reference Value ................................................... 230

Revision: September 2014 AV-4 2015 Pathfinder


Fail-Safe ................................................................ 235 CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR
DTC Index ............................................................. 236 CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List ................... 307 A
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 239 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION
Reference Value ................................................... 239 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 307
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- B
BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 241 TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ........................ 307
Reference Value ................................................... 241 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure ................ 307 C
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ..................................... 244
Reference Value ................................................... 244 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) ............................................................... 307
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT ............................ 248 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND D
Reference Value ................................................... 248 VIEW MONITOR) : Description ............................. 307
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 252 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure ..................... 308 E
Reference Value ................................................... 252
DTC Index ............................................................. 254 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 313
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 255 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 313 F
PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM ............................. 255 DTC Logic .............................................................. 313
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 313
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 255
G
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 314
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 301
DTC Logic .............................................................. 314
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 301
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 315 H
Work Flow ............................................................. 301
DTC Logic .............................................................. 315
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 303
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 316 I
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV DTC Logic .............................................................. 316
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 303
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 317
DTC Logic .............................................................. 317 J
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 303
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 318
CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ...................... 303 DTC Logic .............................................................. 318
K
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) .............. 303 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 318
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De- U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 319
scription ................................................................. 304 DTC Logic .............................................................. 319 L
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 319
Procedure .............................................................. 304
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con- U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 320
figuration List ......................................................... 305 DTC Logic .............................................................. 320 M
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 320
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 305 U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 321 AV
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic .............................................................. 321
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 321
Description ............................................................ 305
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 322 O
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Logic .............................................................. 322
Work Procedure .................................................... 305
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 323 P
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR DTC Logic .............................................................. 323
CONTROL UNIT) ..................................................... 306
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 324
CONTROL UNIT) : Description ............................. 306 DTC Logic .............................................................. 324
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR
CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure ..................... 306
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 325
DTC Logic .............................................................. 325

Revision: September 2014 AV-5 2015 Pathfinder


U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 326 U1264 ANTENNA AMP. ................................... 345
DTC Logic ..............................................................326 DTC Logic ............................................................. 345
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 345
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 327
DTC Logic ..............................................................327 U1265 BOSE AMP. .......................................... 346
DTC Logic ............................................................. 346
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 328 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 346
DTC Logic ..............................................................328
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 347
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 329 Description ............................................................ 347
DTC Logic ..............................................................329
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................329 U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ...................... 348
DTC Logic ............................................................. 348
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 330 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 348
DTC Logic ..............................................................330
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................330 U1303 LED POWER SUPPLY VOLT ............... 352
DTC Logic ............................................................. 352
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 331 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 352
DTC Logic ..............................................................331
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ........ 354
U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 332 DTC Logic ............................................................. 354
DTC Logic ..............................................................332
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................332 U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH ............................... 355
DTC Logic ............................................................. 355
U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 333
DTC Logic ..............................................................333 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 356
DTC Logic ............................................................. 356
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 334
DTC Logic ..............................................................334 U1601, U1603, U1609, U160B FRONT DOOR
SPEAKER/TWEETER ...................................... 357
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 335 DTC Logic ............................................................. 357
DTC Logic ..............................................................335 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 357
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................335
U1627, U162F TWEETER ................................ 358
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 336 DTC Logic ............................................................. 358
DTC Logic ..............................................................336 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 358
U1231 BOSE AMP. .......................................... 337 U162A CENTER SPEAKER ............................. 359
DTC Logic ..............................................................337 DTC Logic ............................................................. 359
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 338 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 359
DTC Logic ..............................................................338 U1684, U168C REAR DOOR SPEAKER/
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................338 TWEETER ......................................................... 360
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ..................................... 339 DTC Logic ............................................................. 360
DTC Logic ..............................................................339 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 360
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................339 U175D WOOFER .............................................. 361
U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 341 DTC Logic ............................................................. 361
DTC Logic ..............................................................341 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 361
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................341 U176A, U1772 ROOF SPEAKER ..................... 362
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ........... 342 DTC Logic ............................................................. 362
DTC Logic ..............................................................342 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 362
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................342 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 363
U125A HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT ............... 343 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 363
DTC Logic ..............................................................343 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 363
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................343
DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 363
U1263 USB ...................................................... 344 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 363
DTC Logic ..............................................................344
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................344 BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 364

Revision: September 2014 AV-6 2015 Pathfinder


BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 364 DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 397
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 397 A
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ........................ 365
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 398
Procedure .............................................................. 365 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 398
B
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ............................................ 366 STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 400
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 366 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 400
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT ................................... 367 C
USB CONNECTOR ......................................... 402
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 402
dure ....................................................................... 367
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT . 403 D
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 368
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 403
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di-
agnosis Procedure ................................................ 368 REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 404
E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 404
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 370
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 370 SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT. 407
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 407 F
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER.. 372
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 372 SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT. 408
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 408
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 375 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 375 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 409
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 378 MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................ 409 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 378 Symptom Table ..................................................... 409
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 381 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 416
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 381 Description ............................................................. 416 I
REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 384 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 425
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 384
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 425 J
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 387 Exploded View ....................................................... 425
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 387 Removal and Installation ....................................... 425
K
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ................ 427
SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................................. 390 Removal and Installation ....................................... 427
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 390
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 428 L
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV Exploded View ....................................................... 428
CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DISPLAY UNIT).. 392 Removal and Installation ....................................... 428
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 392 M
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 429
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV Exploded View ....................................................... 429
CONTROL UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR) .. 393 Removal and Installation ....................................... 429
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 393 AV
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT ........................... 430
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VID- Removal and Installation ....................................... 430
EO DISTRIBUTOR TO HEADREST DISPLAY O
UNIT) ................................................................ 394 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 432
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 394 Removal and Installation ....................................... 432

AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT AUX- FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 433 P
ILIARY INPUT JACKS TO AV CONTROL Exploded View ....................................................... 433
Removal and Installation ....................................... 433
UNIT) ................................................................ 395
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 395 FRONT TWEETER .......................................... 434
Removal and Installation ....................................... 434
IMAGE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 396
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 396 INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER. 435

Revision: September 2014 AV-7 2015 Pathfinder


Removal and Installation .......................................435 Removal and Installation ....................................... 443

CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 436 FRONT CAMERA ............................................. 444


Removal and Installation .......................................436 Removal and Installation ....................................... 444

REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 437 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 445
Exploded View .......................................................437 Removal and Installation ....................................... 445
Removal and Installation .......................................437
SIDE CAMERA ................................................. 446
REAR SPEAKERS .......................................... 438 Removal and Installation ....................................... 446
Removal and Installation .......................................438
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR ..................................... 447
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 439 Removal and Installation ....................................... 447
Exploded View .......................................................439
Removal and Installation .......................................439 REAR AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ................... 448
Removal and Installation ....................................... 448
USB INTERFACE ............................................ 440
Removal and Installation .......................................440 AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................ 449
Location of Antennas ............................................ 449
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ................ 441 Window Antenna Repair ....................................... 449
Removal and Installation .......................................441
GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 451
MICROPHONE ................................................. 442 Removal and Installation ....................................... 451
Removal and Installation .......................................442
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 452
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 443 Removal and Installation ....................................... 452
Exploded View .......................................................443 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 452

Revision: September 2014 AV-8 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011150067

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000011150068
J
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. K
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
L
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000011150069

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
M
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

AV

P
PKIA0306E

Revision: September 2014 AV-9 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000011150070

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: September 2014 AV-10 2015 Pathfinder


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000011150071
B

The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim tool set

AWJIA0483ZZ

F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000011150072

G
Tool name Description
Power tools Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-11 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000011150073

AWNIA3815ZZ

1. Instrument panel tweeter LH 2. Steering switches 3. Audio unit


4. Instrument panel tweeter RH 5. Display unit 6. Front door speaker LH
7. Front door speaker RH 8. Rear door speaker LH 9. Rear door speaker RH

Component Description INFOID:0000000011150074

Part name Description


Audio unit Controls audio and AUX IN functions.
Display unit Display image is controlled by audio unit via serial communication.
Front door speaker Outputs low and mid range sounds.

Revision: September 2014 AV-12 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Part name Description
A
Instrument panel tweeter Outputs high range sounds.
Rear door speaker Outputs low, mid and high range sounds.
• Operations for audio are possible. B
Steering switches
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to audio unit.
• Radio signal received by antenna base is amplified and transmitted to audio unit.
Antenna amp.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from audio unit.
C

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-13 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000011150075

ALNIA1444GB

AUDIO SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000011150076

AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Display unit
• Steering switches
• Front door speakers
• Instrument panel tweeters
• Rear door speakers
• Antenna
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the antenna. The audio unit then sends audio sig-
nals to the front door speakers, instrument panel tweeters and rear door speakers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.

Revision: September 2014 AV-14 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A


AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150077
B

TERMINAL LAYOUT
C

AWNIA3160ZZ
F
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal No.
G
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name H
Output

I
Sound signal front door Ignition
2 3
speaker and instrument Output switch Audio output
(SB) (V)
panel tweeter LH ON
J
SKIB3609E

Ignition
4 5 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Audio output
(BR) (Y) speaker LH L
ON

SKIB3609E
M
Press SOURCE switch 0V

Press switch 1.0V


Ignition
6 15 AV
Steering switch signal A Input switch Press switch 2.0V
(Y) (G)
ON
Press ENTER switch 4.0V
Except above 5.0V O
7
Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery voltage
(P)
Ignition P
9 8
Illumination control signal Input switch Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(R) (B)
ON

Revision: September 2014 AV-15 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Sound signal front door Ignition


11 12
speaker and instrument Output switch Audio output
(BR) (Y)
panel tweeter RH ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
13 14 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Audio output
(L) (SB) speaker RH
ON

SKIB3609E

Press switch 0V

Ignition Press switch 1.0V


16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(BR) (G) Press switch 3.0V
ON
Press DISP switch 4.0V
Except above 5.0V
19
Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(Y)
21 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
22 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
33
— Antenna amp. ON signal Output Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
(B)
34
— AM - FM main Input — — —
(B)
35
— FM sub Input — — —
(B)

Revision: September 2014 AV-16 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150078

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

ALNIA1443ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output G
1 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
2 AV communication signal Input/ H
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
Ignition
3
Ground Ground — switch — 0V I
(B)
ON
8
Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery voltage
(P) J
9
Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(Y)
Ignition K
10 11
Illumination control signal Input switch Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(R) (B)
ON

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-17 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

WIRING DIAGRAM
BASE AUDIO
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011150079

ABNWA2579GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-18 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AV

AANIA1166GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-19 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

ABNIA4760GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-20 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4761GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-21 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

ABNIA7123GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-22 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4763GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-23 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AANIA1171GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-24 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4764GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-25 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

ABNIA4765GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-26 2015 Pathfinder


BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7125GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-27 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000011150080

OVERALL SEQUENCE

ALNIA0182GB

DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).

>> GO TO 2
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected.

>> GO TO 3
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

Revision: September 2014 AV-28 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4 A
NO >> GO TO 2
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
B
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
C
>> GO TO 5
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. D
Has the symptom been repaired?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> GO TO 2 E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-29 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150081

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


19 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
7 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M123.
3. Check voltage between audio unit connector and ground.

Audio unit Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

19 Ignition switch: OFF


M123 — Battery voltage
7 Ignition switch: ACC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150082

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


9 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
8 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: September 2014 AV-30 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
2. Disconnect display unit connector M192.
3. Check voltage between display unit connector and ground. A

Display unit Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.) B
9 Ignition switch: OFF
M192 — Battery voltage
8 Ignition switch: ACC
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
D
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between display unit connector and ground. E

Display unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
M192 3 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
G
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-31 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150083

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M123 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Audio unit Front door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 1
D12 (LH)
3 2
M123 Yes
11 1
D112 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and ground.

Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M123 — No
11
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M123 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M123.

Audio unit connector M123


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-32 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
2 3
A

Audio signal output


11 12 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-47, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-33 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150084

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M123 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.

Audio unit Instrument panel tweeter


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 1
M62 (LH)
3 2
M123 Yes
11 1
M73 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and ground.

Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M123 — No
11
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M123 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M123.

Audio unit connector M123


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-34 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
2 3
A

Audio signal output


11 12 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace instrument panel tweeter. Refer to AV-48, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-35 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150085

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M123 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Audio unit Rear door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 1
D206 (LH)
5 2
M123 Yes
13 1
D306 (RH)
14 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M123 and ground.

Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M123 — No
13
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M123 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M123.

Audio unit connector M123


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-36 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
4 5
A

Audio signal output


13 14 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-49, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-37 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150086

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCHES RESISTANCE


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check the resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M149.

Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω


Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)

Depress SOURCE switch. 1

Depress switch. 121


14
Depress switch. 321
Depress ENTER switch. 2023
17
Depress switch. 1

Depress switch. 121


15
Depress switch. 723

Depress DISP switch. 2023


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-45, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.

Combination meter Combination switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
3 24
M24 24 M30 33 Yes
4 31
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground.

Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
3
M24 24 — No
4
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Revision: September 2014 AV-38 2015 Pathfinder
STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
A
Combination switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B
24 14
M30 31 M149 15 Yes
33 17 C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation". D
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AUDIO UNIT
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M123. E
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and audio unit connector M123.

Combination meter Audio unit


Continuity F
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
14 6
M24 15 M123 16 Yes G
16 15
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground. H

Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal I
14
M24 15 — No
J
16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. K
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect combination meter connector M24 and audio unit connector M123. L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of audio unit connector M123.
M
Audio unit M123
Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.) AV
Terminal Terminal
6
15 5.0 V
16 O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-85, "Removal and Installation". P

Revision: September 2014 AV-39 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000011150087

RELATED TO AUDIO

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


Malfunction in audio unit.
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit
Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-18, "Wiring Diagram".
• Audio unit power supply and ground cir-
No sound from all speakers.
cuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-30, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-34, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instru-
ment panel tweeter).
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-32, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
sound is low. speaker).
Only a certain speaker (instrument panel - AV-36, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door
tweeter LH, instrument panel tweeter RH, speaker).
front door speaker LH, front door speaker • Malfunction in speaker.
RH, rear door speaker LH, rear door speak- Refer to:
er RH) does not output sound. - AV-48, "Removal and Installation" (instru-
ment panel tweeter).
- AV-47, "Removal and Installation" (front
door speaker).
- AV-49, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: September 2014 AV-40 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
A
Malfunction in audio unit.
Noise comes out from all speakers.
Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installation".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between B
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-34, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instru-
ment panel tweeter).
C
- AV-32, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
speaker).
- AV-36, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door D
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- speaker).
er (instrument panel tweeter LH, instrument • Malfunction in speaker.
panel tweeter RH, front door speaker LH, • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
Noise is mixed with audio.
front door speaker RH, rear door speaker lash and looseness). E
LH, rear door speaker RH). Refer to:
- AV-48, "Removal and Installation" (instru-
ment panel tweeter).
- AV-47, "Removal and Installation" (front F
door speaker).
- AV-49, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit. G
Refer to AV-43, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or H
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad antenna feeder.
roads) Refer to AV-50, "Location of Antennas".
• Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc- I
• Any radio station cannot be received or tion.
poor reception is caused even after mov- Refer to AV-15, "Reference Value".
No radio reception or poor reception.
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- antenna feeder. J
stacles generating external noises). Refer to AV-50, "Location of Antennas".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi- K
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-41 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000011150088

RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause

Occurrence condition Possible cause


A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

Revision: September 2014 AV-42 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150089
B

AWNIA3155ZZ K

1. Audio unit bracket (LH) 2. A/C auto amp. 3. Audio unit


4. Audio unit bracket (RH) L

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150090

M
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-95, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C : Removal and Installation". AV
3. Release cluster lid C lower pawls using a suitable tool and
remove.
: Pawl O

ALJIA1082ZZ

4. Remove the screws, then pull out the audio unit.


5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
Revision: September 2014 AV-43 2015 Pathfinder
AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-44 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150091

G
ALOIA0025ZZ

1. Steering switches 2. Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel rear finisher


H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150092

REMOVAL I
NOTE:
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-45, "Removal and Installation". J
2. Release pawls and remove steering wheel rear finisher (1) from
steering wheel (2).
K

M
ALOIA0026ZZ

3. Remove steering switches screws. AV


4. Remove steering switches (1) from steering wheel (2).

ALOIA0027ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-45 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150093

ALNIA1432ZZ

1. Display unit bracket 2. Display unit 3. Front cover


4. A/C display unit A. Screw

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150094

REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the display unit screws, then pull out the display unit and bracket assembly.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the display unit and remove.
4. Remove the display unit bracket screws, then remove the display unit and A/C display unit from the dis-
play unit bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-46 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150095

ALNIA1329ZZ

G
1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Front door speaker 3. Speaker bolt
4. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150096


H

REMOVAL
I
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker bolts.
3. Pull out the front door speaker from the speaker bracket. J
4. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
5. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from front door (if necessary).
INSTALLATION K
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-47 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150097

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the bolts (A), then pull out the instrument panel tweeter
(1).
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the instrument panel
tweeter (1) and remove.

ALNIA1423ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-48 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150098

G
ALNIA1330ZZ

1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Rear door speaker 3. Speaker bolt


4. Speaker bracket
H

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150099

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker bolts. J
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker and remove.
4. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from the rear door (if necessary).
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-49 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antennas INFOID:0000000011150100

AWNIA2589ZZ

1. Antenna base (antenna and antenna amp) 2. M502 3. M501


4. M503, M504 5. M505 6. Antenna Feeder
7. M95, M500 8. Audio unit M113

Window Antenna Repair INFOID:0000000011150101

ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on
each side.

SEL250I

Revision: September 2014 AV-50 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]
• When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger. A

SEL122R

D
2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.

SEL252I
K
3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication
will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.
L

AV

SEL253I

Revision: September 2014 AV-51 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MID AUDIO]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011579207

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
Unit) INFOID:0000000011579208

CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000011579209

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000011579210

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Revision: September 2014 AV-52 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MID AUDIO]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] A

PKIA0306E

D
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.) E

G
PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000011579211


H
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component I
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip. J
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components: K
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth. L
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. M
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-53 2015 Pathfinder


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MID AUDIO]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000011579212

The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534)
Trim tool set

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000011579213

(TechMate No.) Description


Tool name
( — ) Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
Power tools

PIIB1407E

Revision: September 2014 AV-54 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000011579214
B

AV

AWNIA3828ZZ

Revision: September 2014 AV-55 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]

1. Instrument panel tweeter LH 2. Steering switches 3. A/C and AV switch assembly


4. Instrument panel tweeter RH 5. Display unit 6. AV control unit (view with center stack
removed)
7. Microphone 8. USB interface 9. Front auxiliary input jacks
10. Front door speaker LH 11. Front door speaker RH 12. Rear door speaker LH
13. Rear door speaker RH 14. Rear view camera 15. Bluetooth® control unit
16. Satellite radio tuner (if equipped) 17. Bluetooth® antenna

Component Description INFOID:0000000011579215

Part name Description


• Master unit of MULTI AV system.
• AV control unit includes audio, USB connection and vehicle status functions.
• Connected to MULTI AV system control units via AV communication.
• Connected to other vehicle control units via CAN communication to obtain neces-
AV control unit sary information for vehicle information function.
• Inputs signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking
brake).
• TEL voice signal and voice guidance signal are input from Bluetooth® control unit.
• Camera image signal is received and transmitted to display unit.
• Display image is controlled by AV control unit via serial communication.
• Receives power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from AV control unit.
• RGB image signals (RGB image, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) are input
Display unit
from AV control unit.
• Composite image signals are input from AV control unit.
• Synchronizing signals (HP, VP) are output to AV control unit.
Front door speaker Outputs low and mid range sounds.
Instrument panel tweeter Outputs high range sounds.
Rear door speaker Outputs low, mid and high range sounds.
• Operation panels are equipped with switches for audio and air conditioner opera-
tions.
A/C and AV switch assembly
• Operation signal is transmitted via AV communication to AV control unit.
• Disk eject operation signal is performed via hardwire.
• Camera power supply is input from AV control unit.
Rear view camera
• Vehicle rear view image is transmitted to display unit via AV control unit.
• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
Steering switches
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone and voice recognition operation.
Microphone • Microphone signal is transmitted to Bluetooth® control unit.
• Power (Microphone VCC) is supplied from Bluetooth® control unit.
• Radio signal received by window antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV con-
Antenna amp. trol unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
• Inputs satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs sound signal
to AV control unit.
Satellite radio tuner
• Controlled via serial communication (communication signal and request signal) by
AV control unit.
Satellite radio antenna Satellite radio signal is received and transmitted to satellite radio tuner.

• Inputs TEL voice signal from Bluetooth® antenna and outputs it to AV control unit.
Bluetooth® control unit
• Controlled via AV communication by AV control unit.

Bluetooth® antenna Receives TEL voice signal and outputs it to Bluetooth® control unit.
USB connector USB sound and data input signals are transmitted to AV control unit.

Revision: September 2014 AV-56 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
SYSTEM
A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000011579216
B

AV

AWNIA3816GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000011579217

AUDIO SYSTEM
Revision: September 2014 AV-57 2015 Pathfinder
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
The audio system consists of the following components
• AV control unit
• A/C and AV switch assembly
• Display unit
• Steering switches
• Front door speakers
• Instrument panel tweeters
• Rear door speakers
• Antenna
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the antenna. The AV control unit then sends audio
signals to the front door speakers, instrument panel tweeters and rear door speakers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM
The satellite radio system consists of the following components
• Satellite antenna
• Satellite radio tuner
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the satellite radio tuner from the satellite
antenna. The satellite radio tuner then sends audio signals to the AV control unit.
Refer to Owner's Manual for satellite radio system operating instructions.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth® control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone
calls can be sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth®
control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth® control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired
with the Bluetooth® control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to
the cellular telephone operating manual.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
Bluetooth® Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth® control unit will power up. During power up,
the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec-
onds.
Steering Switches
When buttons on the steering switches are pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuits change, depend-
ing on which button is pushed.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switches:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls
Microphone
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth®
control unit. The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
AV Control Unit
The AV control unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM
When the shift selector is in the R position, the display shows a view to the rear of the vehicle. Lines which
indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM

Revision: September 2014 AV-58 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions. A

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-59 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000011579218

The AV control unit on board diagnosis includes the following functions:


• A/C and AV switch assembly self diagnosis that checks the ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in
the A/C and AV switch assembly.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch are not included in this operation check.
• AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the following functions listed in the table below:

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components (between AV
control unit and each unit).
• Color tone check using color spectrum bar display and white display.
Display Diagnosis
• Light and shade check by gradation bar display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition and reverse.
Speaker Test Speaker connection can be confirmed by test tone.
• The system malfunction and frequency of past occurrences is displayed.
Error History • When malfunctioning item is selected, time and place that the malfunc-
tion last occurred are displayed.
Confirmation/
Adjustment • Guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be ad-
Camera Cont. justed.
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis Transmit/receive function of CAN communication can be monitored.
Communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be moni-
AV COMM Diagnosis
tored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start, the screen does not dis-
play anything, or the A/C and AV switch assembly self diagnosis does not function.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000011579219

METHOD OF STARTING
A/C and AV Switch Assembly Self Diagnosis
• Press the BACK and UP switches within 10 seconds after turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds
or more.
• The buzzer sounds, all indicators of the switches illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode begins.
• The ON position continuity of each switch can be checked by
pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if continuity is present.
• The self diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned OFF.

ALNIA1449ZZ

AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis


1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.

Revision: September 2014 AV-60 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
3. While pressing the SETTING button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. When self- A
diagnosis mode begins, a short beep will be heard. Shifting from
current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing
BACK button.
B

G
ALNIA1450ZZ

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag- H


nosis or Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.

SKIB3961E
K
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis
L
1. Select Self Diagnosis.
2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis.
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after self diagnosis is com- M
pleted. Unit names and connection lines are color coded accord-
ing to diagnostic results.Control Unit (AV control unit) is
displayed in red. AV

JSNIA2528ZZ P
Diagnosis results Unit Connection line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction 1 Red Green

1: Control Unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.

Revision: September 2014 AV-61 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
• Replace AV control unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control
unit internal error. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray.
4. Comments of self diagnosis results can be viewed in the diagno-
sis result screen.

JSNIA0141GB

AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis Results

Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red


Screen switch Description Possible cause
• AV control unit power supply or ground
circuits. Refer to AV-142, "AV CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit
Control unit • If no malfunction is detected in AV control
power supply or ground circuit.
unit power supply and ground circuits, re-
place AV control unit. Refer to AV-185,
"Removal and Installation".

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow


Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible cause
Malfunction is detected in serial communi- Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and control unit and display unit. Refer to AV-
display unit. 134, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Satellite radio tuner power supply or
When any of the following is detected:
ground circuits. Refer to AV-144, "SAT-
• satellite radio tuner power supply or
ELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Pro-
ground circuit malfunction.
cedure".
• communication circuit malfunction be-
• Communication circuit between AV con-
Control unit ⇔ SAT tween AV control unit and satellite radio
trol unit and satellite radio tuner. Refer to
tuner.
AV-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• request signal circuit malfunction be-
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
tween AV control unit and satellite radio
trol unit and satellite radio tuner. Refer to
tuner.
AV-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
When any of the following is detected: • Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
®
• Bluetooth control unit power supply or ground circuits. Refer to AV-145, "BLUE-
ground circuit malfunction. TOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
Control unit ⇔ BTHF
• AV communication circuit malfunction Procedure".
between AV control unit and Bluetooth® • AV communication circuits between AV
control unit. control unit and Bluetooth® control unit.

AV Control Unit Confirmation/Adjustment


1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.

Revision: September 2014 AV-62 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
2. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to
display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK A
switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.

AWNIA2562GB

D
Display Diagnosis

JSNIA2233GB

M
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system. AV

JSNIA0149GB

Speaker Test

Revision: September 2014 AV-63 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
Select Speaker Test to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press
Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener-
ate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones.

JSNIA0150GB

Error History
The self diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self diagnosis is
selected until the self diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self
diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error that may have occurred before the self diagnosis
start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT.

Display type of occur-


Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above

JSNIA0151GB

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Revision: September 2014 AV-64 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]

Error item Description Possible cause A


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT, then re-
CAN communication malfunction is detect- pair the malfunctioning components ac-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. cording to diagnosis results. Refer to AV-
B
67, "CONSULT Function"
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc- C
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) tion occurs constantly. Refer to AV-185,
malfunction is detected.
"Removal and Installation".
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected. D
CAN Controller Memory Error
• Display unit power supply or ground cir-
When any of the following is detected:
cuits. Refer to AV-142, "DISPLAY UNIT :
• display unit power supply or ground cir- E
Diagnosis Procedure".
Display Connection Error cuits malfunction.
• Communication circuits between AV con-
• communication circuit malfunction be-
trol unit and display unit. Refer to AV-134,
tween AV control unit and display unit.
"Diagnosis Procedure". F
• Satellite radio tuner power supply or
When any of the following is detected:
ground circuits. Refer to AV-144, "SAT-
• satellite radio tuner power supply or
ELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Pro-
ground circuit malfunction. G
cedure".
• communication circuit malfunction be-
• Communication circuit between AV con-
XM Connection Error tween AV control unit and satellite radio
trol unit and satellite radio tuner. Refer to
tuner.
AV-136, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
• request signal circuit malfunction be-
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
tween AV control unit and satellite radio
trol unit and satellite radio tuner. Refer to
tuner.
AV-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• A/C and AV switch assembly power sup- I
When any of the following is detected:
ply or ground circuits. Refer to AV-146,
• A/C and AV switch assembly power sup-
"A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Di-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ply or ground circuit malfunction.
agnosis Procedure".
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuit malfunction J
• AV communication circuits between AV
between AV control unit and A/C and AV
control unit and A/C and AV switch as-
switch assembly.
sembly.
When any of the following is detected: • Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
K
• Bluetooth®
control unit power supply or ground circuits. Refer to AV-145, "BLUE-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuit malfunction. TOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
• BTHF Unit Connection Error • AV communication circuit malfunction Procedure". L
between AV control unit and Bluetooth® • AV communication circuits between AV
control unit. control unit and Bluetooth® control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT AV communication circuit malfunction be- AV communication circuits between AV
M
• Switches Connection Error tween AV control unit and A/C and AV control unit and A/C and AV switch assem-
• BTHF Unit Connection Error switch assembly. bly.

Camera Cont. AV
The two functions of “Correct Draw Line of Rear view Cam”, “Con-
firm Configuration” are available.
O

JSNIA2230ZZ

Adjust Offset of Rear view Camera

Revision: September 2014 AV-65 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
• Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor
camera.
CAUTION:
After the adjustment, never perform other operations for one
minute.

JSNIA2231ZZ

Factory Configuration Confirmation


• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked.

JSNIA2234ZZ

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis


• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA2235ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(BCM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(VDC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(STRG) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
AV COMM Diagnosis

Revision: September 2014 AV-66 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit and
each unit. A
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
B
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

C
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA2505ZZ
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
D
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(BTHF-ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE: E
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV F
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)
G

JSNIA0154GB I
Initialize Settings
“User Data Initialization” and “Accessory Number Initialization” are
possible. J
CAUTION:
• Never perform Accessory Number Initialization except when
configuration is unsuccessful. K
• Accessory Number Initialization requires configuration. For
details, refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Description".
L

JSNIA2237ZZ
M
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000011579220

CAUTION: AV
After disconnecting the CONSULT vehicle interface (VI) from the data link connector, the ignition must
be cycled OFF → ON (for at least 5 seconds) → OFF. If this step is not performed, the BCM may not go
to ”sleep mode”, potentially causing a discharged battery and a no-start condition.
O
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit.
P
Direct Diagnostic Mode Description
Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.

Revision: September 2014 AV-67 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
Direct Diagnostic Mode Description
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-76, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item [Unit] Description


• On: vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH).
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
• Off: vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH).
• On: parking brake applied.
PKB SIG [On/Off]
• Off: parking brake released.
• On: optical sensor signal is received.
ILLUM SIG [On/Off]
• Off: optical sensor signal is not received.
• On: ignition switch ON.
IGN SIG [On/Off]
• Off: ignition switch ACC.
• On: selector lever in R position.
REV SIG [On/Off]
• Off: selector lever in any position other than R.

CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-18, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".

Revision: September 2014 AV-68 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MID AUDIO]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000011579221

The Bluetooth® control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically B
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the techni-
cian using the steering switches prior to trouble diagnosis.

Bluetooth® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS C


• Internal control unit failure
• Bluetooth® antenna connection open or shorted
D
• Steering switches (PHONE/SEND), (PHONE/END) stuck closed
• Vehicle speed pulse count
• Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
• Bluetooth® inquiry check E

OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. F
2. Wait for the Bluetooth® system to complete initialization. This may take up to 20 seconds.
3. Press and hold the steering switches (PHONE/SEND) but-
ton for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth® system will begin to G
play a verbal prompt.

AWNIA2799ZZ

J
4. While the prompt is playing, press and hold the steering
switches (PHONE/END) button until you hear the “Diagnos-
tics mode” prompt. The Bluetooth® system will sound a 5-sec- K
ond beep.
5. While the beep is sounding, press and hold the steering
switches (PHONE/END) button again until you hear prompts.
L
6. The Bluetooth® system has now entered into the diagnostic
mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the
technician. Refer to AV-69, "Work Flow".
7. After the failure records are reported, an interactive microphone M
test will be performed. Follow the voice prompt. If the micro- AWNIA2800ZZ

phone test fails, refer to AV-69, "Work Flow".


AV
Work Flow INFOID:0000000011579222

Failure Message Action O


“Internal failure” ®
Replace Bluetooth control unit. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".

“Bluetooth® antenna open” 1. Inspect harness connection. P


“Bluetooth® antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".

“Phone/Send for Hands Free System is stuck”


Check steering switches. Refer to AV-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“Phone/End for the Hands Free System is stuck”

“Microphone test” (failed interactive test) 1. Inspect harness between Bluetooth® control unit and microphone.
2. Replace microphone. Refer to AV-196, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-69 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011579223

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status


Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On
Parking brake released. Off
PKB SIG
Parking brake applied. On
Optical sensor signal is not received. Off
ILLUM SIG
Optical sensor signal is received. On
Ingnition switch OFF or ACC. Off
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off
REV SIG
Selector lever in R position. On

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA3159ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition During voice guide output


5 4
(W) (B) Bluetooth® voice signal Input switch
with switch pressed.
ON

SKIB3609E

6 — Shield — — — —
10
Ground Eject ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(V)

Revision: September 2014 AV-70 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
11 Input/ B
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
12 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output C
13 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
14 AV communication signal Input/ D
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
15 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output E
16 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
F

Ignition
20 22
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX mode selected. G
(W) (B)
ON

SKIB3609E H

Ignition I
21 22
AUX sound signal LH Input switch AUX mode selected.
(R) (B)
ON
J
SKIB3609E

25 — Shield — — — —
K
Ignition Pressing eject switch. 0V
28
Ground CD (DVD) eject signal Input switch
(Y) Except above. 5.0 V
ON
29 L
Ground Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
(LG)

Ignition Selector lever in R position. Battery voltage


30 M
Ground Reverse signal Input switch Selector lever in any posi-
(R) 0V
ON tion other than R.
Ignition Parking brake applied. 0V
31 AV
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G) Parking brake released. 12 V
ON
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de- O
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
Ignition
32 Vehicle speed approx. 40 P
Ground Vehicle speed signal Input switch
(GR) km/h (25 MPH)
ON

JSNIA0012GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-71 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Sound signal front door Ignition


34 35
speaker and instrument Output switch Audio output
(SB) (V)
panel tweeter LH ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
36 37 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Audio output
(BR) (Y) speaker LH
ON

SKIB3609E

Press SOURCE switch 0V

Press switch 1.0V


Ignition Press switch 2.0V
38 47
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(G) (B)
ON Press switch 3.0V

Press ENTER switch 4.0V


Except above 5.0V
39
Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery voltage
(P)
Ignition Lighting switch OFF 0V
41
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(R) Lighting switch ON Battery voltage
OFF

Sound signal front door Ignition


43 44
speaker and instrument Output switch Audio output
(BR) (Y)
panel tweeter RH ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition
45 46 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Audio output
(L) (SB) speaker RH
ON

SKIB3609E

Press switch 0V

Press switch 1.0V


Ignition
48 47 Press switch 2.0V
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(W) (B)
ON 3.0V
Press switch
Press DISP switch 4.0V
Except above 5.0V

Revision: September 2014 AV-72 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
51 B
Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(Y)
52
Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B) C

Ignition D
53 Camera image or AUX im-
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(B) age displayed
ON
E
SKIB2251J

54 Composite image signal


Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(W) ground F

G
Ignition Begin Confirmation/Adjust-
55
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch ment mode, then select
(W)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar”
H
SKIB2237J

Ignition Begin Confirmation/Adjust-


56
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch ment mode, then select
(B) J
ON “Color Spectrum Bar”

SKIB2236J
K

Ignition Begin Confirmation/Adjust- L


57
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch ment mode, then select
(R)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar”

M
SKIB2238J

AV
58
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output Ignition switch ON
(B)
O

SKIB3603E

59 — Shield (RGB SYN GND) — — — — P

Revision: September 2014 AV-73 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
RGB image displayed 5.0 V

Ignition
60
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(W) AUX image displayed
ON

PKIB4948J

Ignition
61 Communication signal Adjusting display bright-
Ground Input switch
(B) (DISP→CONT) ness
ON

PKIB5039J

62 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input Ignition switch ON
(G) (HP) signal

SKIB3601E

63
Ground Signal ground — Ignition switch OFF 0V
(B)
64
Ground Signal VCC Output Ignition switch ACC 9.0 V
(V)
66 — Shield — — — —
67 — Shield — — — —
72 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
73 Communication signal Adjusting display bright-
Ground Output switch
(W) (CONT→DISP) ness
ON

PKIB5039J

74 Vertical synchronizing (VP)


Ground Input Ignition switch ON
(R) signal

SKIB3598E

75
Ground Inverter ground — Ignition switch OFF 0V
(LG)
76
Ground Inverter VCC Output Ignition switch ACC 9.0 V
(L)

Revision: September 2014 AV-74 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition
82 C
Ground Camera image signal Input switch Camera image displayed
(B)
ON

SKIB2251J D

E
Ignition
83
Ground AUX image signal Input switch AUX image displayed
(W)
ON
F
SKIB2251J

Ignition
87 Selector lever in “R” posi- G
Ground Camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(R) tion
ON
88
Ground Camera ground — Ignition switch ON 0V H
(W)
89 — Shield — — — —
90 — Shield — — — —
I
91
Ground AUX image signal ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)

Ignition
94 93 Satellite radio sound signal Satellite radio mode select-
Input switch
(B) (W) LH ed K
ON

SKIB3609E
L

Ignition M
96 95 Satellite radio sound signal Satellite radio mode select-
Input switch
(G) (R) RH ed
ON

AV
SKIB3609E

97 — Shield — — — —
98 — Shield — — — — O

P
Ignition
100 Request signal Satellite radio mode select-
Ground Input switch
(W) (SAT→CONT) ed
ON

SKIA9299J

Revision: September 2014 AV-75 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal No.
Description
(Wire color) Value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
101 Communication signal Satellite radio mode select-
Ground Input switch
(B) (SAT→CONT) ed
ON

SKIA9300J

Ignition
102 Communication signal Satellite radio mode select-
Ground Output switch
(R) (CONT→SAT) ed
ON

SKIA9301J

121
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W)
122
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
123
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
124
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R)
125 — Shield — — — —
126
— Antenna amp. ON signal Output Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
(B)
127
— AM - FM main Input — — —
(B)
128
— FM sub Input — — —
(B)

DTC Index INFOID:0000000011579224

CONSULT Display Reference Page


U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-117, "DTC Logic"
U1010: CONTROL UNIT AV-118, "DTC Logic"
U1200: CONT UNIT AV-119, "DTC Logic"
U1216: CAN CONT AV-120, "DTC Logic"
U1218: HDD CONN AV-121, "DTC Logic"
U1219: HDD READ AV-122, "DTC Logic"
U121A: HDD WRITE AV-123, "DTC Logic"
U121B: HDD COMM AV-124, "DTC Logic"
U121C: HDD ACCESS AV-125, "DTC Logic"
U121D: DSP CONN AV-126, "DTC Logic"
U121E: DSP COMM AV-127, "DTC Logic"
U1225: USB CONTROLLER AV-128, "DTC Logic"

Revision: September 2014 AV-76 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
CONSULT Display Reference Page
A
U1227: DVD COMM AV-129, "DTC Logic"
U1228: SUB CPU CONN AV-130, "DTC Logic"
U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION AV-131, "DTC Logic" B
U122A: CONFIG UNFINISH AV-132, "DTC Logic"
U122E: Built-in AUDIO CONN AV-133, "DTC Logic"
U1240: SWITCH CONN AV-140, "Description" C
U1243: FRONT DISP CONN AV-134, "DTC Logic"
U1255: SAT CONN AV-136, "DTC Logic"
D
U1256: HAND FREE CONN AV-140, "Description"
U1263: USB OVERCURRENT AV-138, "DTC Logic"
U1264: ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL (OPEN or SHORT) AV-139, "DTC Logic" E
U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-140, "Description"
U1310: CONTROL UNIT AV-141, "DTC Logic"
F

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-77 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011579225

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA1727ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9V
(L)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9V
(V)
ACC
Ignition
4
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —

Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
6
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(B)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1030ZZ

7 — Shield (RGB GND) — — — —

Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Output switch —
(G) (HP) signal
ON

SKIB3601E

Revision: September 2014 AV-78 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image is displayed. 5V B

9
Ignition C
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
(W) At DVD image is displayed.
ON

D
PKIB4948J

Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(W) (CONT→DISP) brightness. F
ON

PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
H
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
I

Ignition
15 At rear view camera image J
Ground Composite image signal Input switch
(B) is displayed.
ON

SKIB2251J K

Start Confirmation/Adjust- L
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
17
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(R)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen. M
JSNIA1029ZZ

AV
Start Confirmation/Adjust-
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
18
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(W) O
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Display Diagnosis screen.

JSNIA1031ZZ
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-79 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(B)
ON

SKIB3603E

Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
Ground Output switch —
(R) signal
On

SKIB3598E

21 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
22 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(B) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

23 — Shield — — — —

Revision: September 2014 AV-80 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011579226

AWNIA2563ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal Description F
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
G

Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio H
Output switch
(B) (W) LH mode is selected
ON

I
SKIB3609E

J
Ignition
24 23 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio
Output switch
(G) (R) RH mode is selected
ON
K

SKIB3609E

25 — Shield — — — — L
26 — Shield (DATA GND) — — — —

M
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio
Ground Output switch
(W) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON AV

SKIA9299J

Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio P
Ground Output switch
(R) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON

SKIA9300J

Revision: September 2014 AV-81 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output

Ignition
30 Communication signal When satellite radio
Ground Input switch
(B) (CONT→SAT) mode is selected
ON

SKIA9301J

Ignition
32
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
35
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(GR)
ON
Ignition
36
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(BG)
ACC
37
— Satellite antenna — — — —
(B)

Revision: September 2014 AV-82 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011579227

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

AWNIA2564ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description
(wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/out- (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
put G
1
Ground Battery power Input – – Battery voltage
(Y)
Ignition H
2
Ground ACC power Input switch – Battery voltage
(R)
ACC/ON
Ignition I
3 switch
Ground IGN power Input – Battery voltage
(P) ON/
START
J
4 Ignition
Ground Ground – – 0V
(B) switch ON
5 – Shield – – – —
K
7
8 MIC in signal Input – – –
(B)

9 10
Ignition Bluetooth® control
Audio out Output switch unit sends audio sig-
(W) (B)
ACC/ON
M
nal

SKIB3609E
AV
20 Ignition
Ground Ground – – 0V
(B) switch ON
22 Ignition
Ground Ground – – 0V O
(B) switch ON
24 Ignition
Ground Ground – – 0V
(B) switch ON
P
27 Ignition
Ground Ground – – 0V
(B) switch ON

Revision: September 2014 AV-83 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MID AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/out- (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
put

When vehicle speed


28 Vehicle speed signal Ignition
Ground Input is approx. 40 km/h
(V) (8-pulse) switch ON
(25 MPH)

PKIA1935E

29 Ignition
Ground Microphone power Output – 5V
(W) switch ON
35
– M-CAN1 (H) – – – —
(SB)
36
– M-CAN1 (L) – – – —
(LG)
43
(B)
– Bluetooth® antenna – – – —

44 – Shield – – – —

Revision: September 2014 AV-84 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
MID AUDIO SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011579228
B

AV

ABNWA2580GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-85 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNWA2581GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-86 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNWA2582GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-87 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNWA1838GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-88 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNWA2583GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-89 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7075GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-90 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4769GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-91 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA4770GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-92 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4771GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-93 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7076GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-94 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7077GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-95 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7078GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-96 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7079GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-97 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7080GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-98 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4777GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-99 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AANIA1185GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-100 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4778GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-101 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA4779GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-102 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4780GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-103 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7081GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-104 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7124GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-105 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA4783GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-106 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4784GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-107 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA4785GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-108 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA4786GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-109 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

ABNIA7082GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-110 2015 Pathfinder


MID AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MID AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7126GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-111 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MID AUDIO]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000011579229

OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWNIA2486GB

Reference 1: Refer to AV-67, "CONSULT Function".


Reference 2: Refer to AV-179, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.

>> GO TO 2
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS (CONSULT)
1. Connect CONSULT and perform “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “MULTI AV”.
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Revision: September 2014 AV-112 2015 Pathfinder
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MID AUDIO]
Is any DTC No. displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3 A
NO >> GO TO 4
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (CONSULT)
B
1. Check the DTC No. indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC No. list. Refer to AV-76, "DTC Index".
NOTE:
Start with the diagnosis for the CAN communication system if “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] or CONTROL C
UNIT (CAN) [U1010]” is displayed.

>> GO TO 5 D

4.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM


Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-179, "Symptom E
Table".

>> GO TO 5 F
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
NOTE: G
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC No. has
been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
H
>> GO TO 6
6.CHECK AFTER REPAIR I
1. Perform self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT after repairing or replacing the malfunctioning
parts.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results. J
Is any DTC No. displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 7 K
7.FINAL CHECK
Perform the operation check to confirm that the malfunction symptom is solved or that any other symptoms
are present. L
Are any symptoms present?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Inspection End. M

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-113 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MID AUDIO]
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000011579230

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000011579231

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


-CONSULT
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing AV control unit.

>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration".
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura-
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
lines) are normal.

>> Work End.


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Revision: September 2014 AV-114 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MID AUDIO]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000011579232

A
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows: B
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
"Before Replace ECU" C
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. D
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU"
with CONSULT. E
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new AV control unit. F

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000011579233

G
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit. H

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3. I
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT J
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.
K
>> Work End.
3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” L
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-116, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL M
UNIT) : Configuration List".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
AV
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION: O
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con-
figuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized. P
5. When "Completed", select "End".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.

Revision: September 2014 AV-115 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MID AUDIO]
>> Work End.
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000011579234

CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.

MANUAL SETTING ITEM


Items Setting value
CAMERA SYSTEM NONE/AVM ⇔ REAR CAMERA
SOUND SYSTEM BASE ⇔ BOSE
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

Revision: September 2014 AV-116 2015 Pathfinder


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579235
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


C
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000] D
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579236

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


F
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed? G
YES >> Refer to LAN-21, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
H

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-117 2015 Pathfinder


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579237

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction oc-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. curs constantly.
[U1010]
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-118 2015 Pathfinder


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579238

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction oc-
CONT UNIT
AV control unit malfunction is detected. curs constantly.
[U1200] C
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-119 2015 Pathfinder


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579239

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs
CAN CONT
AV control unit malfunction is detected. constantly.
[U1216]
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-120 2015 Pathfinder


U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579240

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
C
HDD CONN tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U1218] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-121 2015 Pathfinder


U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579241

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
HDD READ tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U1219] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-122 2015 Pathfinder


U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579242

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
C
HDD WRITE tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121A] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-123 2015 Pathfinder


U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579243

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
HDD COMM tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121B] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-124 2015 Pathfinder


U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579244

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
C
HDD ACCESS tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121C] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-125 2015 Pathfinder


U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579245

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DSP CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U121D]
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579246

1.CHECK CD PLAYBACK
Check the CD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the CD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally?
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-126 2015 Pathfinder


U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579247

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DSP COMM C
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U121E]
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579248

1.CHECK CD PLAYBACK E
Check the CD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the CD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally? F
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-127 2015 Pathfinder


U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579249

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


USB CONTROLLER Check that connection to USB connector is nor-
USB connection malfunction is detected.
[U1225] mal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-128 2015 Pathfinder


U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579250

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DVD COMM C
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U1227]
stantly.
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579251

1.CHECK DVD PLAYBACK E


Check the DVD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the DVD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally? F
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-129 2015 Pathfinder


U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579252

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
SUB CPU CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1228]
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-130 2015 Pathfinder


U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579253

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
iPod CERTIFICATION
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1229] C
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-131 2015 Pathfinder


U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579254

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Write configuration data.
CONFIG UNFINISH
Configuration data is incomplete. Refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CON-
[U122A]
TROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579255

1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
When U122A is detected, configuration data must be written.

>> Write configuration data with CONSULT. Refer to AV-115, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Work Procedure".

Revision: September 2014 AV-132 2015 Pathfinder


U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579256

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
Built-in AUDIO CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U122E] C
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-133 2015 Pathfinder


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579257

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


When any of the following is detected:
• display unit power supply or ground circuit mal- • Display unit power supply and ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN
function. • Serial communication circuits between display
[U1243]
• serial communication circuit malfunction be- unit and AV control unit.
tween display unit and AV control unit.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579258

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


Check display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-142, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector M136.
3. Check continuity between display unit connector M93 terminals 11, 22 and AV control unit connector
M136 terminals 73, 61.

Display unit AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
11 73
M93 M136 Yes
22 61
4. Check continuity between display unit connector M93 terminals 11, 22 and ground.

Display unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
11
M93 — No
22
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (CONT→DISP)
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector M136.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 11 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-134 2015 Pathfinder


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

Display unit Ground A


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal
B

When adjusting dis- C


M93 11 —
play brightness.

D
PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DISP→CONT)
F
Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 22 and ground.

Display unit Ground


G
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal
H

When adjusting dis- I


M93 22 —
play brightness.

PKIB5039J J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation". K

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-135 2015 Pathfinder


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579259

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


When any of the following is detected:
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and ground cir-
• satellite radio tuner power supply or ground circuit
cuits.
malfunction.
SAT CONN • Communication circuits between AV control unit
• communication circuit malfunction between AV
[U1255] and satellite radio tuner.
control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• Request signal circuits between AV control unit
• request signal circuit malfunction between AV
and satellite radio tuner.
control unit and satellite radio tuner.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579260

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-144, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M138 and satellite radio tuner connector B2.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 terminals 100, 101, 102 and satellite radio
tuner connector B2 terminals 28, 29, 30.

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
100 28
M138 101 B2 29 Yes
102 30
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 terminals 100, 101, 102 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
100 Ground
M138 101 No
102
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M138.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M138 terminals 100, 101 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-136 2015 Pathfinder


U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

AV control unit Ground A


Voltage
(+)
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
100
M138 — 7.0 V
101
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER VOLTAGE D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M138.
E
3. Connect satellite radio tuner connector B2.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner connector B2 terminal 32 and ground.
F
Satellite radio tuner Ground
Voltage
(+)
(−) (Approx.) G
Connector Terminal
B2 30 — 7.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-197, "Removal and Installation".
I

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-137 2015 Pathfinder


U1263 USB
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1263 USB
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579261

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


USB OVERCURRENT Check USB harness between the AV control unit
Overcurrent in USB connector is detected.
[U126] and USB connector.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579262

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS


Visually inspect USB interface harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-193, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
Check USB interface harness continuity. Refer to AV-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-193, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-138 2015 Pathfinder


U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579263

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL Antenna amp. ON signal circuit open or short cir- Antenna amp. ON signal circuit between AV con-
[U1264] cuited. trol unit and antenna amp.
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579264

D
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

E
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA BASE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M155 and antenna base connector M502. F
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M155 and antenna base connector M502.

AV control unit Antenna base G


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M155 126 M502 2 Yes
H
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M155 and ground.

AV control unit I
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M155 126 — No
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M155.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M155 and ground.

AV control unit Ground M


Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
AV
M155 126 — Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-199, "Location of Antennas". O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-139 2015 Pathfinder


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000011579265

U1300 is indicated when a malfunction occurs in the communication signal of the multi AV system. Indicated
simultaneously, without fail, the malfunction of control units connected to the AV control unit through communi-
cation circuits. Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


When any of the following is detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • A/C and AV switch assembly power supply or • A/C and AV switch assembly power supply and
[U1300] ground circuit malfunction. ground circuits.
• SWITCH CONN • AV communication circuit malfunction between • AV communication circuits between AV control
[U1240] AV control unit and A/C and AV switch assem- unit and A/C and AV switch assembly.
bly.
When any of the following is detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • Bluetooth® control unit power supply and ground
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply or ground
[U1300] circuits.
circuit malfunction.
• HAND FREE CONN • AV communication circuits between AV control
• AV communication circuit malfunction between
[U1256] unit and Bluetooth® control unit.
AV control unit and Bluetooth® control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
• SWITCH CONN AV communication circuit malfunction between AV AV communication circuits between AV control unit
[U1240] control unit and A/C and AV switch assembly. and A/C and AV switch assembly.
• HAND FREE CONN
[U1256]

Revision: September 2014 AV-140 2015 Pathfinder


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011579266

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV com-
constantly.
[U1310] munication circuit. C
Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-141 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579267

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


29 Ignition signal 29 (5A)
39 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
51 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M124 and M125.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connectors and ground.

AV control unit Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

M124 29 Ignition switch: ON


39 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
M125
51 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 terminal 52 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M125 52 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579268

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK INVERTER VCC AND SIGNAL VCC (POWER SUPPLY) CIRCUIT 1


Revision: September 2014 AV-142 2015 Pathfinder
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2, 3 and ground.
A
Display unit Voltage
Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

2 B
M93 — Ignition switch: ACC 9.0 V
3
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INVERTER VCC AND SIGNAL VCC (POWER SUPPLY) CIRCUIT CONTINUITY D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminals 64, 76 and display unit connector E
M93 terminals 3, 2.

AV control unit Display unit F


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
64 3
M136 M93 Yes G
76 2
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminals 64, 76 and ground.
H
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
64 I
M136 — No
76
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INVERTER VCC AND SIGNAL VCC (POWER SUPPLY) CIRCUIT 2 K
1. Connect the AV control unit connector M136.
2. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M136 terminals 64, 76 and ground.
L
AV control unit Ground
Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal M
64
M136 — Ignition switch: ACC 9.0 V
76
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". O
4.CHECK INVERTER GROUND AND SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. P
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminals 63, 75 and display unit connector
M93 terminals 14, 13.

Revision: September 2014 AV-143 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
63 14
M136 M93 Yes
75 13
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between display unit connector M93 terminal 1 and ground.

Display unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M93 1 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579269

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


32 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
36 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner connector B2.
3. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner connector B2 terminal 32, 36 and ground.

Satellite radio tuner Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

32 Ignition switch: OFF


B2 — Battery voltage
36 Ignition switch: ACC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner connector B2 terminal 35 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-144 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

Satellite radio tuner A


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B2 35 — Yes
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
C
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579270

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".


E

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown. F

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


1 Battery power supply 15 (15A) G
2 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
3 Ignition signal 30 (10A)
H
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
J
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B3.
3. Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 and ground.
K
Bluetooth® control unit Voltage
Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

1 Ignition switch: OFF L


B3 2 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
3 Ignition switch: ON
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
AV
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 and ground. O

Bluetooth® control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal P
4
20
B3 22 — Yes
24
27

Revision: September 2014 AV-145 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579271

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


3 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 3 and ground.

A/C and AV switch assembly Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

M98 3 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M124.
3. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 9 and AV control unit con-
nector M124 terminal 10.

A/C and AV switch assembly AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M98 9 M124 10 Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 1 and ground.

A/C and AV switch assembly


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M98 1 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: September 2014 AV-146 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579272

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and suspect front door speaker connector.
G
AV control unit Front door speaker
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
34 1
D12 (LH)
35 2
M125 Yes
43 1 I
D112 (RH)
44 2
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and ground.
J

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
34
35
M125 — No L
43
44
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M125.

AV control unit connector M125 P


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-147 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
34 35

Audio signal output


43 44

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-190, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-148 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579273

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connec-
tor. G

AV control unit Instrument panel tweeter


Continuity H
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
34 1
M62 (LH)
35 2
M125 Yes I
43 1
M73 (RH)
44 2
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and ground. J

AV control unit
Ground Continuity K
Connector Terminal
34
35 L
M125 — No
43
44
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
AV
3.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. O
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M125.
P
AV control unit connector M125
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-149 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
34 35

Audio signal output


43 44

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace instrument panel tweeter. Refer to AV-191, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-150 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579274

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
G
AV control unit Rear door speaker
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
36 1
D206 (LH)
37 2
M125 Yes
45 1 I
D306 (RH)
46 2
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M125 and ground.
J

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
36
37
M125 — No L
45
46
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M125 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M125.

AV control unit connector M125 P


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-151 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
36 37

Audio signal output


45 46

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-192, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-152 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579275

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M124 and front auxiliary input jacks connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
20 1
M124 M205 Yes F
21 3
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 and ground.
G
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
20 H
M124 — No
21
Is inspection result normal?
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY J
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks K


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M124 22 M205 2 Yes
L
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M
3.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M124 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. AV
3. Select AUX mode.
4. Check signals between AV control unit connector M124 and ground.
O
AV control unit connector M124 Condition Reference value
(+) (−)
P
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-153 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
20 22

AUX mode selected


21 22

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace front auxiliary input jacks. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-154 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
SATELLITE AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579276

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK SATELLITE SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M138 and satellite radio tuner connector B2. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 and satellite radio tuner connector B2.

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
94 22
M138 B2 Yes F
96 24
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 and ground.
G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
94 H
M138 No
96
Is the inspection result normal?
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK SATELLITE SOUND SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY J
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M138 and satellite radio tuner connector B2.

AV control unit Satellite radio tuner K


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
93 21
M138 B2 Yes L
95 23
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK SATELLITE SOUND SIGNAL
AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M138 and satellite radio tuner connector B2.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Select satellite radio mode.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M138. O

AV control unit connector M138


P
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-155 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
94 93

Satellite radio mode selected


96 95

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-197, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-156 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579277

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M124 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B3. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 5 and Bluetooth® control unit connec-
tor B3 terminal 9.
E
AV control unit Bluetooth® control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
M124 5 B3 9 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 5 and ground.
G
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
H
M124 5 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
J
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 4 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B3
terminal 10.

K
AV control unit Bluetooth® control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M124 4 B3 10 Yes L
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M
3.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M124 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B3. AV
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Press switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M124. O

Revision: September 2014 AV-157 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

AV control unit connector M124


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

During voice guide output with


5 4
switch pressed.

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-158 2015 Pathfinder


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579278

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 57 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 17.
E
AV control unit Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 57 M93 17 Yes F
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 57 and ground.

G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 57 No H
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 17 and ground.

K
Display unit Ground
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal L

“Color Spectrum Bar” M


M93 17 — on DISPLAY DIAG-
NOSIS screen.
A V

SKIB2238J

Is inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-159 2015 Pathfinder


RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579279

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 56 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 6.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 56 M93 6 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 56 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 56 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 6 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

“Color Spectrum Bar”


M93 6 — on DISPLAY DIAG-
NOSIS screen.

SKIB2236J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-160 2015 Pathfinder


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579280

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 55 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 18.
E
AV control unit Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 55 M93 18 Yes F
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 55 and ground.

G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 55 No H
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 18 and ground.

K
Display unit Ground
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal L

“Color Spectrum Bar” M


M93 18 — on DISPLAY DIAG-
NOSIS screen.
A V

SKIB2237J

Is inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-161 2015 Pathfinder


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579281

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 58 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 19.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 58 M93 19 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 58 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 58 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 19 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

M93 19 —

SKIB3603E

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-162 2015 Pathfinder


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579282

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 60 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 9.
E
AV control unit Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 60 M93 9 Yes F
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 60 and ground.

G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 60 No H
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 9 and ground.

K
Display unit Ground
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal L
RGB image displayed. 5.0 V

M93 9 —
AUX image displayed.
AV

PKIB4948J

O
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-163 2015 Pathfinder


HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579283

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 62 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 8.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 62 M93 8 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 62 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 62 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 8 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

M93 8 —

SKIB3601E

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-164 2015 Pathfinder


VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579284

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 74 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 20.
E
AV control unit Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 74 M93 20 Yes F
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 74 and ground.

G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 74 No H
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 20 and ground.

K
Display unit Ground
(+) Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal L

M
M93 20 —

AV
SKIB3598E

Is inspection result normal?


O
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-165 2015 Pathfinder


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579285

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 53 and display unit connector M93 ter-
minal 15.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 53 M93 15 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 53 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M136 53 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M136 terminal 54 and display unit connector M93 terminal
4.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M136 54 M93 4 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M136 and display unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminal 15 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

Camera image dis-


M93 15 —
played.

SKIB2251J

Revision: September 2014 AV-166 2015 Pathfinder


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation". A
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-167 2015 Pathfinder


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579286

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M137 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 83 and front auxiliary input jacks con-
nector M205 terminal 7.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 83 M205 7 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 83 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 83 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M137 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 91 and front auxiliary input jacks con-
nector M205 terminal 8.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 91 M205 8 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M137 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between front auxiliary input jacks connector M205 terminal 7 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-168 2015 Pathfinder


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

Front auxiliary input jacks Ground A


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal
B

C
M205 7 — AUX image displayed.

D
SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Replace front auxiliary input jacks. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-169 2015 Pathfinder


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579287

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M137 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 87 and rear view camera connector
D504 terminal 1.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 87 D504 1 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 87 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 87 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M137 and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 87 and ground.

AV control unit Ground


Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M137 87 — Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M137 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 82 and rear view camera connector
D504 terminal 3.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 82 D504 3 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 82 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-170 2015 Pathfinder


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

AV control unit A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M137 82 No
B
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. C
4.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 88 and rear view camera connector D504
terminal 2. D

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity E
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M137 88 D504 2 Yes
Is inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL G
1. Connect AV control unit connector M137 and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”. H
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M137 terminal 82 and ground.

AV control unit Ground I


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal
J

Camera image dis-


K
M137 82 —
played.

L
SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation". M
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-198, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-171 2015 Pathfinder


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579288

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M124 and A/C and AV switch assembly connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 28 and A/C and AV switch assembly
connector M98 terminal 14.

AV control unit A/C and AV switch assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M124 28 M98 14 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 28 and ground.

AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M124 28 No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M124 and A/C and AV switch assembly connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M124 terminal 28 and ground.

AV control unit Ground


Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Pressing eject switch 0V
M124 28 —
Except above 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace A/C and AV switch assembly. Refer to AV-187, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-172 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579289

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 and microphone connector. D
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 terminals 7, 8, 29 and microphone con-
nector R109 terminals 6, 5, 3.
E
Bluetooth® control unit Microphone
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
7 6
B3 8 R109 5 Yes
29 3 G
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 terminals 7, 8, 29 and ground.
H
Bluetooth® control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
7 I
B3 8 — No
29
J
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
2.CHECK MICROPHONE VCC VOLTAGE
1. Connect Bluetooth® control unit connector B3.
L
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3.
M
Bluetooth® control unit connector B3
Voltage
(+) (−) (Approx.)
Terminal Terminal AV
29 8 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL P
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3.

Revision: September 2014 AV-173 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

Bluetooth® control unit connector B3


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

7 8 Speak into microphone.

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-196, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-174 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579290

1.CHECK CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY B


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B3.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B3 terminals 20, 24 and ground. C

Bluetooth® control unit D


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
20
B3 — Yes
24 E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-195, "Removal and Installation".
F
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-175 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579291

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCHES RESISTANCE


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check the resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M149.

Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω


Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)

Depress SOURCE switch. 1

Depress switch. 121

14 Depress switch. 321

Depress switch. 723

Depress ENTER switch. 2023


17
Depress switch. 1

Depress switch. 121


15 321
Depress switch.

Depress switch. 723

Depress DISP switch. 2023


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-188, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.

Combination meter Combination switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
3 24
M24 24 M30 33 Yes
4 31
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground.

Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
3
M24 24 — No
4
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: September 2014 AV-176 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. A
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
B

Combination switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
24 14
M30 31 M149 15 Yes
33 17
D

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M125. F
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and AV control unit connector M125.

Combination meter AV control unit G


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
14 38
H
M24 15 M125 48 Yes
16 47
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground. I

Combination meter
Ground Continuity J
Connector Terminal
14
M24 15 — No K
16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. L
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE M
1. Connect combination meter connector M125 and AV control unit connector M125.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of AV control unit connector M125.
AV

AV control unit M125


Voltage
(+) (−) O
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
38
47 5.0 V
48 P

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-85, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-177 2015 Pathfinder


USB CONNECTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
USB CONNECTOR
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011579292

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M145 and USB interface connector M209.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M145 and USB interface connector M209.

AV control unit USB interface


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
121 2
122 1
M145 123 M209 4 Yes
124 3
125 5
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M145 and ground.

AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
121
M145 Ground No
123
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-193, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: September 2014 AV-178 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000011579293
B

RELATED TO AUDIO
C
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-60, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
D
tion".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-85, "Wiring Diagram".
No sound from all speakers. • AV control unit power supply and ground E
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker. F
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-147, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front G
door speaker).
- AV-149, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front in-
No sound comes out or the level of the strument panel tweeter).
sound is low. Only a certain speaker (front door speaker - AV-151, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear H
LH, front door speaker RH, front instrument door speaker).
panel tweeter LH, front instrument panel • Malfunction in speaker.
tweeter RH, rear door speaker LH, rear Refer to:
I
door speaker RH) does not output sound. - AV-190, "Removal and Installation" (front
door speaker).
- AV-191, "Removal and Installation" (front
instrument panel tweeter). J
- AV-192, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-60, "On Board Diagnosis K
Function".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-179 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in AV control unit.
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-60, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-147, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door speaker).
- AV-149, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front in-
strument panel tweeter).
- AV-151, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- door speaker).
er (front door speaker LH, front door speak- • Malfunction in speaker.
Noise is mixed with audio. er RH, front instrument panel tweeter LH, • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
front instrument panel tweeter RH, rear lash and looseness).
door speaker LH, rear door speaker RH). Refer to:
- AV-190, "Removal and Installation" (front
door speaker).
- AV-191, "Removal and Installation" (front
instrument panel tweeter).
- AV-192, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-60, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad antenna feeder.
roads) Refer to AV-199, "Location of Antennas".
• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc-
• Any radio station cannot be received or
tion.
poor reception is caused even after mov-
No radio reception or poor reception. • Poor connector connection of antenna or
ing to a service area with good reception
antenna feeder.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob-
Refer to AV-199, "Location of Antennas".
stacles generating external noises).
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
or AV control unit. Perform DTC diagno-
sis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self
Refer to AV-67, "CONSULT Function".
diagnosis result.
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-67, "CONSULT Function".
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
No satellite radio reception. Refer to AV-199, "Location of Antennas".
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT
antenna feeder.
self diagnosis result.
• Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
Refer to AV-67, "CONSULT Function".
nut.
Refer to AV-199, "Location of Antennas".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone.

Revision: September 2014 AV-180 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Check Compatibility
A
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern. B
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with C
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list. D
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action. E
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”. F
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
G
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone. H
play at the guide).
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established.
I
Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-195,
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver- J
sation.
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
K
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
• The voice recognition can be controlled.
Steering switch malfunction.
• Steering switch’s , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-188,
"Removal and Installation". M
switch works, but does not work.
The system cannot be operated.
Steering switch’s , , , and Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
switches do not work. AV
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
All steering switches do not work.
Refer to AV-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO REAR VIEW CAMERA O

Revision: September 2014 AV-181 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
Reverse signal circuit malfunction. BCM and AV control unit.
Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image signal circuit malfunction
between rear view camera and AV control
Rear view camera is inoperative. Camera image signal circuit malfunction.
unit.
Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Replace rear view camera.
Rear view camera malfunction. Refer to AV-198, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: September 2014 AV-182 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000011579294

RELATED TO NOISE B
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or C
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the D
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera- E
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one. F

Type of Noise and Possible Cause


G
Occurrence condition Possible cause
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
H
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper- I
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction J
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when K
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


L
Symptom Cause and Counter measure

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized M


Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-179, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
AV
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
O
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE: P
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

Revision: September 2014 AV-183 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MID AUDIO]
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

Revision: September 2014 AV-184 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579295
B

ALNIA1436ZZ K

1. AV control unit bracket (LH) 2. A/C auto amp. 3. AV control unit


4. AV control unit bracket (RH) L

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579296

M
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the
ignition switch OFF. AV
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform "READ CONFIGURATION" to save current vehicle specifi-
cation. Refer to AV-116, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List".
NOTE: O
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C : Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the screws, then pull out the AV control unit.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the AV control unit and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:

Revision: September 2014 AV-185 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-116, "CONFIGURA-
TION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List".

Revision: September 2014 AV-186 2015 Pathfinder


A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579297

REMOVAL B
1. Remove cluster lid C lower. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C LOWER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the A/C and AV switch assembly lower screws.
C
3. Release upper pawls and remove A/C and AV switch assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-187 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579298

ALOIA0025ZZ

1. Steering switches 2. Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel rear finisher

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579299

REMOVAL
NOTE:
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-45, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release pawls and remove steering wheel rear finisher (1) from
steering wheel (2).

ALOIA0026ZZ

3. Remove steering switches screws.


4. Remove steering switches (1) from steering wheel (2).

ALOIA0027ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-188 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579300

J
ALNIA1430ZZ

1. Display unit 2. Display unit bracket A. Display unit bracket screws K

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579301

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the display unit screws, then pull out the display unit and bracket. M
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the display unit and remove.
4. Remove the display unit bracket screws and the display unit from the display unit bracket (if necessary).
AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O

Revision: September 2014 AV-189 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579302

ALNIA1329ZZ

1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Front door speaker 3. Speaker bolt


4. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579303

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker bolts.
3. Pull out the front door speaker from the speaker bracket.
4. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
5. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from front door (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-190 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579304

REMOVAL B
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the bolts (A), then pull out the instrument panel tweeter
(1). C
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the instrument panel
tweeter (1) and remove.
D

ALNIA1423ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-191 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579305

ALNIA1330ZZ

1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Rear door speaker 3. Speaker bolt


4. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579306

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker bolts.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker and remove.
4. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from the rear door (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-192 2015 Pathfinder


USB INTERFACE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
USB INTERFACE
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579307

REMOVAL B
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-18, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the USB interface.
C
3. Release the pawl from the back of USB interface, then remove USB interface.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-193 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579308

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-18, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the front auxiliary input jack.
3. Remove front auxiliary input jack screws and the front auxiliary input jack.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-194 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579309

J
AWNIA2954ZZ

1. Bluetooth control unit 2. Bluetooth antenna K

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579310

L
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-95, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-197, "Removal and Installation" M
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from bluetooth control unit.
4. Remove bluetooth control unit screws and the bluetooth control unit.
AV
5. Remove the bluetooth antenna screws and the bluetooth antenna.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O

Revision: September 2014 AV-195 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579311

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front room/map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-59, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the microphone (1) from the front room/map lamp
assembly.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging.

AWNIA2584ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Make sure the microphone is firmly secure after installation.

Revision: September 2014 AV-196 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011579312

J
AWNIA2954ZZ

1. Bluetooth control unit 2. Bluetooth antenna K

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579313

L
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-95, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-31, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : M
Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from satellite radio antenna.
4. Remove the screws and the satellite radio tuner. AV

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O

Revision: September 2014 AV-197 2015 Pathfinder


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579314

REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-43, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear view camera screws (A), then remove rear view
camera (1) from the back door outer finisher (2).

ALNIA1427ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-198 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
AUDIO ANTENNA
A
Location of Antennas INFOID:0000000011579315

I
AWNIA2589ZZ

1. Antenna base (satellite antenna and antenna 2. M502 3. M501 J


amp)
4. M503, M504 5. M505 6. Antenna Feeder
7. M95, M500 8. AV control unit M155
K
Window Antenna Repair INFOID:0000000011579316

ELEMENT CHECK L

1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on


each side.
M

AV

SEL250I

Revision: September 2014 AV-199 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
• When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger.

SEL122R

2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.

SEL252I

3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication


will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.

SEL253I

Revision: September 2014 AV-200 2015 Pathfinder


BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579317

REMOVAL B
1. Remove luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-31, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the bluetooth antenna harness connector from bluetooth control unit. C
3. Remove bolts and the bluetooth antenna from bracket.
INSTALLATION D
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-201 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MID AUDIO]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011579318

REMOVAL
1. Lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect harness connector from antenna feeder.
3. Remove nut from satellite antenna (1) and remove.
: Front

AWNIA2587ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
If the satellite antenna nut is not tightened to the specified torque, lower sensitivity of the antenna may
be experienced. If the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000011579319

DISASSEMBLY
Insert a suitable tool into gaps between satellite antenna (2) and the
cover (1), then remove the cover (1) from satellite antenna (2).

ALNIA1335ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Revision: September 2014 AV-202 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011150345

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
J
Unit) INFOID:0000000011150346

CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF. K
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds. L
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000011150347

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM M
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before AV
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000011150348
O
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-203 2015 Pathfinder


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000011150349

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: September 2014 AV-204 2015 Pathfinder


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000011150350
B

The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim tool set

AWJIA0483ZZ

F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000011150351

G
Tool name Description
Power tools Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-205 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000011150352

AWNIA2808ZZ

Revision: September 2014 AV-206 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ALNIA1447ZZ

P
1. Front tweeter LH 2. Instrument panel tweeter LH 3. Steering switches
4. A/C and AV switch assembly 5. Front tweeter RH 6. Instrument panel tweeter RH
7. Display unit 8. Center speaker 9. AV control unit (view with center stack
removed)
10. Microphone 11. USB interface 12. Front auxiliary input jacks
13. Front door speaker LH 14. Front door speaker RH 15. Rear door speaker LH

Revision: September 2014 AV-207 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
16. Rear door tweeter LH 17. Rear side speaker LH 18. Rear side speaker RH
19. Headrest display unit (driver seat) (if 20. Rear auxiliary input jacks (if equipped) 21. Headrest display unit (passenger seat)
equipped) (if equipped)
22. Subwoofer 23. Bose speaker amp. 24. Around view monitor control unit (if
equipped)
25. Front camera (if equipped) 26. Rear view camera 27. Door mirror LH (side camera) (if
equipped)
28. Door mirror RH (side camera) (if 29. Video distributor (if equipped)
equipped)

Component Description INFOID:0000000011150353

Part name Description


• Master unit of MULTI AV system.
• AV control unit includes audio, hands-free phone, navigation, USB connection,
DVD play and vehicle status functions.
• Integrates hard disk drive (HDD) allowing map data and music data to be stored.
• Connected to MULTI AV system control units via AV communication.
• Connected to other vehicle control units via CAN communication to obtain neces-
sary information for vehicle function.
• Receives steering angle signal via CAN communication from steering angle sen-
sor and controls an expected course line during around view monitor operation.
AV control unit
• Inputs signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and parking
brake).
• Composite image signal are output to front display unit.
• Transmits image and sound output to video distributor and inputs image switch sig-
nal from headrest display units via AV communication.
• Receives an Intelligent Key identification signal necessary for Intelligent Key inter-
locking function via hard wire from BCM.
• Transmits Amp. ON signal and mode change signal to BOSE speaker amp.
• Update of map data is performed using DVD-ROM.
• Display image is controlled by AV control unit via serial communication.
• Receives power from AV control unit.
• Composite image signals are input from AV control unit.
Display unit • Synchronizing signals are output to AV control unit.
• Camera image signals are input from around view monitor control unit via video
output signal.
• Touch panel functions can be operated by touching display directly.
Receives sound signals from AV control unit and outputs sound signals to each
BOSE speaker amp.
speaker.
Instrument panel tweeter Outputs high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Center speaker Outputs mid and high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Front tweeter Outputs high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Front door speaker Outputs low, mid and high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Rear door tweeter Outputs high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Rear door speaker Outputs low, mid and high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Rear side speaker Outputs low, mid and high range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
Subwoofer Outputs low range sound signals from BOSE speaker amp.
• Operation panels are equipped with switches for audio and air conditioner opera-
tions.
A/C and AV switch assembly • Operation signal is transmitted via AV communication to AV control unit and
around view monitor.
• Disk eject operation signal is performed via hardwire.
• Operations for audio, hands-free phone and voice recognition are possible.
Steering switches
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
Connected to AV control unit via CAN communication and transmits steering angle
Steering angle sensor
sensor signal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-208 2015 Pathfinder


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Part name Description
A
• Receives image and sound signals from AV control unit and transmits them to
headrest display units.
• Receives image and sound signals from rear auxiliary input jacks and transmits
Video distributor
them to headrest display units. B
• Transmits image and sound signals to headrest display unit and receives image
switch signal from headrest display units.
• Composite image signals are input from video distributor.
• Receives DVD/AUX/USB sound signals from video distributor and transmits them
C
to headphones.
Headrest display units • Transmits image switch signal to video distributor according to remote control op-
eration. D
• Transmits image switch signal to AV control unit via AV communication according
to remote control operation.
Front auxiliary input jacks Transmits image and sound signals to AV control unit.
E
Rear auxiliary input jacks Transmits image and sound signals to video distributor and headrest display units.
• Supplies power to front, rear and side cameras.
• Superimposes images from each camera and outputs them to display unit.
• Superimposes guiding line, predicted course line and sonar indicator to camera
F
image that outputs to display unit.
Around view monitor control unit • Performs reception/transmission of communication signals with cameras.
• Transmits sonar operation signal from sonar control unit via CAN communication. G
• Receives sonar information from sonar control unit via CAN communication.
• Transmits data received/transmitted from sonar control unit to AV control unit via
CAN communication.
• Inputs power supply from around view monitor control unit.
H
• Outputs image of vehicle front to around view monitor control unit.
Front camera
• Performs reception/transmission of communication signal with around view moni-
tor control unit.
I
• Inputs power supply from around view monitor control unit.
• Outputs image of vehicle rear to around view monitor control unit.
Rear view camera
• Performs reception/transmission of communication signal with around view moni-
tor control unit. J
• Inputs power supply from around view monitor control unit.
• Outputs image of vehicle LH side to around view monitor control unit.
Side camera LH
• Performs reception/transmission of communication signal with around view moni- K
tor control unit.
• Inputs power supply from around view monitor control unit.
• Outputs image of vehicle RH side to around view monitor control unit. L
Side camera RH
• Performs reception/transmission of communication signal with around view moni-
tor control unit.
• Used for hands-free phone operations.
Microphone • Microphone signal is transmitted to AV control unit. M
• Power (Microphone VCC) is supplied from AV control unit.
GPS antenna GPS signal is received and transmitted to AV control unit.
AV
• Radio signal received by window antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV con-
Antenna amp. trol unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
USB connector USB sound and data input signals are transmitted to AV control unit. O

Revision: September 2014 AV-209 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM
MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000011150354

AWNIA3829GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000011150355

AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• AV control unit
• A/C and AV switch assembly
• Display unit

Revision: September 2014 AV-210 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• Steering switches
• BOSE speaker amp. A
• Center speaker
• Instrument panel tweeters
• Front tweeters
B
• Front door speakers
• Rear door tweeters
• Rear door speakers
• Rear side speakers C
• Subwoofer
• Antenna
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the window antenna. The AV control unit then D
sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio signals before
sending them to the speakers, tweeters and subwoofer.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
E
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The satellite radio system consists of the following components
• Satellite antenna
• AV control unit F
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the AV control unit from the satellite
antenna. The AV control unit then sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp.
Refer to Owner's Manual for satellite radio system operating instructions. G
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation H
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
I
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the AV control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be
sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the AV control unit. When J
a cellular telephone or the AV control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the AV control unit.
Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to the cellular telephone operating
manual.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions. K

AV Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the AV control unit will power up. During power up, the AV
L
control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 seconds.
Steering Switches
When buttons on the steering switches are pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuits change, depend- M
ing on which button is pushed.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switches:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Answer and end telephone calls AV
• Adjust the volume of calls
• Record memos
Microphone O
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the AV control unit.
The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
P
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Operation

NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.

Revision: September 2014 AV-211 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle
as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by
the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map data, which is stored in the hard disk drive (HDD) (map-matching), and indicated on the
screen with a current-location mark.

By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the


GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.

SEL684V

Travel Distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed input signal. Therefore, the calculation may
become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has
been adopted.
Travel Direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.

Type Advantage Disadvantage


• Direction errors may accumulate when the ve-
• Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) hicle is driven for long distances without stop-
accurately.
ping.
• Can detect the vehicle's travel direction • Correct direction cannot be detected when the
GPS antenna (GPS information)
(North/South/East/West). vehicle speed is low.

Map–Matching
Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map data stored on the
HDD.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
The road map data is based on data stored on the HDD.
SEL685V

Revision: September 2014 AV-212 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur- A
rently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has
been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
B
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them C
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road.
SEL686V

D
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded on the HDD, or when
the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern E
are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching
function may find another road and position the current-location
mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current- F
location mark may leap to it.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data G
read from the HDD is limited. Therefore, when there is an exces-
ALNIA0671GB
sive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on
the map, correction by map-matching is not possible. H
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and con-
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS I
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 mi).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the J
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimen-
sional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in K
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calcu-
lated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satel-
SEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions. L
• In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
• There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning, M
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the
arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
• Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from AV
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
• Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
O
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.
P
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
• Image and sound can be output from an external device connected to the front auxiliary input jacks.
• AUX image signals are transmitted to each unit as follows:
- To the display unit via AV control unit.
- To the headrest display units via AV control unit and video distributor.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each unit as follows:
- To each speaker via AV control unit and BOSE speaker amp.

Revision: September 2014 AV-213 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
- To video distributor via AV control unit.
• Headphone sound signals are transmitted via infrared communication between headrest display units and
headphones.
REAR ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
• Image and sound (DVD, USB memory-stored video data and front auxiliary input) played by AV control unit
can be enjoyed in rear seat using headrest display units and headphones.
• Image and sound of an external device connected to rear auxiliary input jacks for rear seat can be enjoyed in
rear seat using headrest display units and headphones. Also, image and sound from rear auxiliary input
jacks can be selected and played individually on each side as well as on both sides.
NOTE:
Image signal and sound signal from rear auxiliary input jacks are not transmitted to front display unit and each
speaker.
Operation Signal
• The rear entertainment system can be controlled by the rear seat remote control.
• The rear seat remote control transmits the operation signal to the remote control receiver built into headrest
display units, which then transmits it to the AV control unit and video distributor.
Headphone Sound
• Sound signals output from AV control unit or rear auxiliary input jacks are transmitted to headrest display
units via video distributor.
• Headphone sound signals are transmitted via infrared communication between headrest display units and
headphones.
Headrest Display Units
• Composite image signals from AV control unit are transmitted to headrest display unit via video distributor.
• Image switch signals from headrest display units are transmitted to AV control unit and video distributor,
according to rear seat remote control operation.
• When image switch signal is transmitted from headrest display unit to AV control unit via AV communication,
image played by AV control unit (DVD, USB memory-stored video data, and front auxiliary input) switches.
• When image switch signal is transmitted from headrest display unit to video distributor, image output from
AV control unit and image output from rear auxiliary input jacks switch.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
• This system is equipped with wide-angle high-resolution cameras on the front and rear of the vehicle and on
both right and left door mirrors. The images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-
eye view that shows the view from the top of the vehicle are displayed to monitor the vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit cuts out and expands the image received from each camera to create each
view.
• The sonar indicator is viewed on display (superimposed on the camera image) in combination with the cam-
era assistance sonar system to warn of the approach of an obstacle.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predictive course lines are superimposed
and displayed. In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are dis-
played.
• The Birds-Eye view converts the images from 4 cameras into the overhead view and displays the status of
the vehicle. The vehicle icon and sonar indicator on the Birds-Eye view display are rendered by around view
monitor control unit.
Around View Monitor Screen
• Around view monitor combines and displays the travel direction view and Birds-Eye view, Front-Side view
and then displays the sonar indicator on the Birds-Eye view, Front-Side view, Rear wide view.
• AV control unit renders the Change View switch, view icon, warning message on display.
Operation Description
NOTE:
The first, second, and third camera image displayed when switched to the camera image display depends on
the settings of Camera View Priority.
• Around view monitor operates by pressing the CAMERA switch on the A/C and AV switch assembly and
shifting the selector lever to the R position.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than R, the screen is switched to the around view monitor by
pressing the CAMERA switch.
• The screen is switched to the around view monitor by shifting the selector lever to the R position.

Revision: September 2014 AV-214 2015 Pathfinder


SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• The around view monitor’s, Birds-Eye view, Front-side view or rear wide view (rear only) can be switched by
pressing the CAMERA switch. A
• The around view monitor is cancelled 3 minutes after pressing the CAMERA switch, and the display returns
to the previous screen.
• ON/OFF setting of sonar indicator display on the Front-Side view screen can be performed.
B
• In Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the 4 cameras. The
invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Birds-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON.
• The sonar operates only when the camera screen is displayed.
C
VEHICLE INFORMATION FUNCTION
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, maintenance and navigation are displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while receiving data signal through CAN communication
from ECM and combination meter. D
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings
function.
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCKING FUNCTION E
The AV control unit recognizes a door-unlocked state of Intelligent Key according to an Intelligent Key recogni-
tion signal transmitted from BCM and saves two different types of audio settings and navigation settings.
F
Settings saved in the AV control unit
• Map display
• Route guidance
• Locator G
• Route search
• Sound quality
• Radio preset H
• Language

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-215 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000011150356

The AV control unit on board diagnosis includes the following functions:


• A/C and AV switch assembly self diagnosis that checks the ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in
the A/C and AV switch assembly.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch are not included in this operation check.
• AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the following functions listed in the table below:

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale dis-
play and touch panel calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition, reverse, side view switch and room lamp.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve-
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
Navigation
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
Confirmation/ place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
Synchronize FES Clock –
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Hands-free Phone
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
Camera guidlines can be adjusted and the factory configuration can be
Camera cont.
displayed.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
Version Information Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start, the screen does not dis-
play anything, or the A/C and AV switch assembly self diagnosis does not function.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000011150357

METHOD OF STARTING
A/C and AV Switch Assembly Self Diagnosis

Revision: September 2014 AV-216 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• Press the BACK and UP switches within 10 seconds after turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds A
or more.
• The buzzer sounds, all indicators of the switches illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode begins.
B
• The ON position continuity of each switch can be checked by
pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if continuity is present.
• The self diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned OFF. C

ALNIA1451ZZ

D
AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the SETTING button, turn the volume control dial E
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. When self-
diagnosis mode begins, a short beep will be heard. Shifting from
current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing F
BACK button.

ALNIA1452ZZ

L
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag-
nosis or Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
M

AV

O
AWNIA2600GB

SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE


P
AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Select Self Diagnosis.
2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis.

Revision: September 2014 AV-217 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.

AWNIA2813GB

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction 1 Red Green

1: Control Unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.


• Replace AV control unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control
unit internal error. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray.
4. Comments of self diagnosis results can be viewed in the diagno-
sis result screen.

JPNIA1787ZZ

AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis Results

Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red


Screen switch Description Possible cause
• AV control unit power supply or ground
circuit.
Refer to AV-363, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit
Control Unit • If no malfunction is detected in AV control
power supply and ground circuits.
unit power supply and ground circuits, re-
place AV control unit.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

Revision: September 2014 AV-218 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow A


Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible cause
Malfunction is detected in serial communi-
Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and B
control unit and front display.
front display.
When one of the following is detected: • A/C and AV switch assembly power sup-
• malfunction is detected in A/C and AV ply or ground circuit. C
switch assembly power supply and Refer to AV-365, "A/C AND AV SWITCH
Control unit ⇔ Switch ground circuits. ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure".
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- • AV communication circuits between AV
cation circuits between AV control unit control unit and A/C and AV switch as- D
and A/C and AV switch assembly. sembly.
GPS antenna connection malfunctions de- Check the connection of the GPS antenna
Control unit ⇔ GPS Antenna
tected. connector. E
• Video distributor power supply or ground
When one of the following is detected: circuit.
• malfunction is detected in video distribu- Refer to AV-366, "VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
tor power supply and ground circuits. : Diagnosis Procedure". F
• malfunction is detected in headrest dis- • Headrest display unit LH power supply or
Control unit ⇔ Video Dist.(Rear)
play unit LH power supply and ground ground circuit.
Video Dist.(Rear) ⇔ Rear display 2
circuits. Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
G
cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and headrest display unit (driver seat). control unit and headrest display unit
(driver seat). H
When one of the following is detected:
• Headrest display unit RH power supply
• malfunction is detected in headrest dis-
or ground circuit.
play unit RH power supply and ground
Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY I
circuits.
Video Dist.(Rear) ⇔ Rear display 2 UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
• malfunction is detected in AV communi-
• AV communication circuits between
cation circuits between headrest display
headrest display unit (driver seat) and
unit (driver seat) and headrest display J
headrest display unit (passenger seat).
unit (passenger seat).

AV Control Unit Confirmation/Adjustment


1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment. K
2. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to
display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK
switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.
L

AV
JSNIA2990ZZ

Revision: September 2014 AV-219 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Display Diagnosis

AWNIA2603GB

Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

JSNIA2991ZZ

Speaker Test

Revision: September 2014 AV-220 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Select Speaker Test to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press
Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener- A
ate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones.

JPNIA1828ZZ

D
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is
adjusted. E

JSNIA2179ZZ
H
SPEED CALIBRATION
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis- I
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted
on tires. J

JSNIA2180ZZ
L
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned M
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of AV
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in the AV control unit, the correct date and time
of occurrence may not be able to be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error O
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur-
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend- P
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT.
Count up method B

Revision: September 2014 AV-221 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT.

Display type of occur-


Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take


Perform diagnosis with CONSULT, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ed. ing to the diagnosis results.
Refer to AV-226, "CONSULT Function".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
Connection Of Gyro tion occurs constantly.
Connection of G Sensor Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
CAN Controller Memory Error AV control unit malfunction is detected.
Bluetooth® Module Connection Error
Sub CPU Connection Error
Audio connection error
DSP Connection Error • If a disc can be played, there is a possi-
bility of an intermittent malfunction.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
DSP Communication Error function occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
HDD Connection Error • If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning
normally, there is a possibility of an inter-
HDD Read Error
mittent malfunction.
HDD Write Error AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly.
HDD Communication Error
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
HDD Access Error tion".
GPS Communication Error • An intermittent error caused by strong ra-
dio interference may be detected unless
GPS ROM Error
any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.)
GPS RAM Error occurs.
GPS malfunction is detected.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
function occurs constantly.
GPS RTC Error Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
Write configuration data with CONSULT.
The writing of configuration data is incom-
Unfinished configuration Refer to AV-304, "CONFIGURATION (AV
plete.
CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
Check connection to USB connector is nor-
USB Controller Communication Error USB connection malfunction is detected.
mal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-222 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
A
• If DVD can be played, there is a possibil-
ity of an intermittent malfunction.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
DVD Mechanism Communication Error AV control unit malfunction is detected.
function occurs constantly. B
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
Adjust the predictive course line center po-
Predictive course line center position ad- sition of the steering angle sensor.
C
Steer. Angle Sensor Calibration justment of the steering angle sensor is in- Refer to AV-307, "PREDICTED COURSE
complete. LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
: Work Procedure". D
• Front display unit power supply or
When one of the following is detected:
ground circuit.
• malfunction is detected in front display
Refer to AV-363, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diag-
unit power supply and ground circuits. E
Front Display Connection Error nosis Procedure".
• malfunction is detected in Serial commu-
• Serial communication circuits between
nication circuits between AV control unit
AV control unit and front display unit.
and front display unit.
Refer to AV-339, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
• Video distributor power supply or ground
When one of the following is detected: circuit.
• malfunction is detected in video distribu- Refer to AV-366, "VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
tor power supply and ground circuits. : Diagnosis Procedure". G
• malfunction is detected in headrest dis- • Headrest display unit (driver seat) power
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
play unit (driver seat) power supply and supply or ground circuit.
• 2nd Display Connection Error
ground circuits. Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY
H
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
cation circuits between AV control unit • AV communication circuits between AV
and headrest display unit (driver seat). control unit and headrest display unit
(driver seat). I
When one of the following is detected: • Headrest display unit (passenger seat)
• malfunction is detected in headrest dis- power supply or ground circuit.
play unit (passenger seat) power supply Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY
and ground circuits. UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". J
3rd Display Connection Error
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- • AV communication circuits between
cation circuits between headrest display headrest display unit (driver seat) and
unit (driver seat) and headrest display headrest display unit (passenger seat).
K
unit (passenger seat). Refer to AV-343, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AM/FM antenna amplifier short to ground Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit be-
Radio antenna amp. ON signal circuit mal-
tween AV control unit and antenna amp.
AM/FM antenna amplifier open function is detected. L
Refer to AV-345, "Diagnosis Procedure".
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- Check the connection of the GPS antenna
GPS Antenna Error
tected. connector.
Check USB harness between AV control
M
USB electric current Error Detection of overcurrent in USB connector. unit and USB connector.
Refer to AV-402, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Front Left Tweeter: open AV
Sound signal circuits between BOSE
Front Left Tweeter: short Malfunction is detected in sound signal cir-
speaker amp. and instrument panel tweeter
cuits between BOSE speaker amp. and in-
Front Left Tweeter: short to ground LH.
strument panel tweeter LH.
Refer to AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
Front Left Tweeter: short to battery
Front Right Tweeter: open
Sound signal circuits between BOSE
Front Right Tweeter: short Malfunction is detected in sound signal cir- P
speaker amp. and instrument panel tweeter
cuits between BOSE speaker amp. and in-
Front Right Tweeter: short to ground RH.
strument panel tweeter RH.
Refer to AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Front Right Tweeter: short to battery

Revision: September 2014 AV-223 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Left Front: open
Left Front: short
Left Front: short to ground
Left Front: short to battery Malfunction is detected in sound signal cir- Sound signal circuits between BOSE
cuits between BOSE speaker amp. and speaker amp. and front door speaker.
Right Front: open front door speaker. Refer to AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Right Front: short
Right Front: short to ground
Right Front: short to battery
Left Rear: open
Left Rear: short
Left Rear: short to ground
Left Rear: short to battery Malfunction is detected in sound signal cir- Sound signal circuits between BOSE
cuits between BOSE speaker amp. and speaker amp. and rear door speaker.
Right Rear: open rear door speaker. Refer to AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Right Rear: short
Right Rear: short to ground
Right Rear: short to battery
When one of the following is detected: • A/C and AV switch assembly power sup-
• malfunction is detected in A/C and AV ply or ground circuit.
switch assembly power supply and Refer to AV-365, "A/C AND AV SWITCH
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
ground circuits. ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Switches Connection Error
• malfunction is detected in AV communi- • AV communication circuits between AV
cation circuits between AV control unit control unit and A/C and AV switch as-
and A/C and AV switch assembly. sembly.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction is detected in AV communica- AV communication circuits between AV
• Switches Connection Error tion circuits between AV control unit and A/ control unit and A/C and AV switch assem-
• 2nd Display Connection Error C and AV switch assembly. bly.

Vehicle CAN Diagnosis


• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA2391ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(TPMS) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
AV COMM Diagnosis

Revision: September 2014 AV-224 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit. A
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
B
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

C
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA4591ZZ
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
D
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Amp–Audio) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 E
C Rx(AVM–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Disp.3–Video Dist) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(Video Dist–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
F

NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN
G
Hands-Free Phone
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment and microphone
and speaker test functions are also available. H

AWNIA2607GB

Camera Cont. K
The three functions of “Alter/Confirm Configuration”, “Reset Configuration” and “Camera System Type” are
available.
L
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been M
removed.)

AV

AWNIA2608GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-225 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Initialize Settings
“User Data Initialization” and “Accessory Number Initialization” are
possible.
CAUTION:
• Never perform Accessory Number Initialization except when
configuration is unsuccessful.
• Accessory Number Initialization requires configuration. For
details, refer to AV-304, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Description".

JSNIA2190ZZ

Version Information
Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.

JSNIA2191ZZ

CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000011150358

CAUTION:
After disconnecting the CONSULT vehicle interface (VI) from the data link connector, the ignition must
be cycled OFF → ON (for at least 5 seconds) → OFF. If this step is not performed, the BCM may not go
to ”sleep mode”, potentially causing a discharged battery and a no-start condition.

CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit.

Direct Diagnostic Mode Description


Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-236, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

Revision: September 2014 AV-226 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Monitor Item [Unit] Description A


Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
PKB SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of park brake signal. B
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the A/C and AV switch assembly.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal.
C
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.

CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-304, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description". D
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-18, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-227 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000011150359

CAUTION:
After disconnecting the CONSULT vehicle interface (VI) from the data link connector, the ignition must
be cycled OFF → ON (for at least 5 seconds) → OFF. If this step is not performed, the BCM may not go
to ”sleep mode”, potentially causing a discharged battery and a no-start condition.

CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the around view monitor control unit.

Direct Diagnostic Mode Description


Ecu Identification The around view monitor control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The around view monitor control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The around view monitor control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
Work support The settings for around view monitor control unit functions can be changed.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing around view monitor control unit.
CAN Diag Support Mntr The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of around view monitor control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-254, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item Description


ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of steering angle sensor signal.
REVERSE SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates selector lever position.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL [mph/km/h] Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera switch signal.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera OFF signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE [Absolute] Indicates steering angle sensor type.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE [Type O] Indicates steering gear ratio type.
STEERING POSITION [LHD/RHD] Indicates LH or RH drive type.
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.

WORK SUPPORT

Support Item Setting Description


NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER — ON/OFF setting of non-viewable area can be performed.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE DIS-
— ON/OFF setting of non-viewable area can be performed.
PLAY
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE
— Factory image calibration restoration can be performed.
CALIBRATION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
— Steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment can be performed.
ADJUSTMENT

Revision: September 2014 AV-228 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Support Item Setting Description
A
STATUS

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE AXIS X


Performs calibration of front camera.
(FRONT CAMERA) AXIS Y B
ROTATE
STATUS
AXIS X C
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
Performs calibration of passenger side camera.
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE
D
STATUS

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE AXIS X


Performs calibration of driver side camera.
(DR-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y E
ROTATE
STATUS
F
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE AXIS X
Performs calibration of rear view camera.
(REAR CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE G
STATUS
SELECT
Confirmation and adjustment of difference between each camera can be per- H
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW AXIS X
formed.
AXIS Y
ROTATE I
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
J
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-18, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
K

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-229 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150360

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status


Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On
Parking brake released. Off
PKB SIG
Parking brake applied. On
Illumination signal is not received. Off
ILLUM SIG
Illumination signal is received. On
Ignition switch OFF or ACC. Off
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off
REV SIG
Selector lever in R position. On

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA3157ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Revision: September 2014 AV-230 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Bose Amp. ON signal Output switch — Battery voltage
(SB)
ACC
C

Ignition D
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output
(B) (W)
ON

E
SKIB3609E

F
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output
(B) (W)
ON
G

SKIB3609E

Keep pressing SOURCE H


0V
switch.

Keep pressing switch. 1.0 V


Ignition 2.0 V I
6 15 Keep pressing switch.
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(G) (B)
ON Keep pressing switch 3.0 V

Keep pressing ENTER J


4.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 5.0 V
Ignition K
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(P)
ACC
10
— Shield — — — —
L
(BR)

M
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output
(W) (B)
ON
AV

SKIB3609E

Ignition
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output P
(B) (W)
ON

SKIB3609E

Revision: September 2014 AV-231 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Keep pressing 0V
switch.

Keep pressing 1.0 V


switch.
Ignition
16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch Keep pressing switch. 2.0 V
(W) (B)
ON
Keep pressing switch. 3.0 V

Keep pressing DISP


4.0 V
switch.
Except for above. 5.0 V
Ignition
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Ignition
24 39 When front AUX mode is
AUX sound signal LH Input switch
(R) (B) selected.
ON

SKIB3609E

Ignition When DVD or USB mode is


26 40
Sound signal LH Output switch selected on headrest dis-
(W) (R)
ON play unit LH or RH.

SKIB3609E

Ignition When DVD or USB mode is


27 41
Sound signal RH Output switch selected on headrest dis-
(B) (G)
ON play unit LH or RH.

SKIB3609E

37 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
38 39 When front AUX mode is
AUX sound signal RH Input switch
(W) (B) selected.
ON

SKIB3609E

42 — Shield — — — —

Revision: September 2014 AV-232 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition Parking brake is applied. 0V B
53
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G) Parking brake is released. 12 V
ON
Ignition C
55 Composite image signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(W) ground
ON

Ignition
56
Ground Composite image signal Output switch At DVD image is displayed. E
(B)
ON

SKIB2251J
F
57
— I-Key memory — — — —
(BG)
Ignition G
60
Ground Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(W)
ON

Ignition
61 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(W) (CONT→DISP)
ON
brightness. I

PKIB5039J
J
62 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
63 AV communication signal Input/ K
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
64
— M CAN–L TRM — — — —
(LG)
L
67
— MR output — — — —
(P)
Ignition
68 M
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(LG)
ON
Selector lever is in R posi-
Ignition Battery voltage AV
69 tion.
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(R) Selector lever is in other
ON 0V
than R position.
NOTE: O
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
P
Ignition
70 Vehicle speed signal (8- When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(GR) pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON

JSNIA0012GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-233 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
71 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
72 Composite image synchro-
Ground Output switch At DVD image is displayed.
(R) nizing signal
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
75
59 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice.
(B)
ON

SKIB3609E

76 — Shield — — — —

Ignition
77 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(B) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J

78 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
79 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(SB) (H) Output
80
— M CAN–H TRM — — — —
(SB)
Ignition
83 Selector lever in “R” posi-
Ground Camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(R) tion
ON
84
Ground Camera ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(W)

Ignition
91 At front AUX image is dis-
Ground AUX image signal Input switch
(W) played.
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
92
Ground AUX image signal ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
94 — Shield — — — —
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
97
Ground Disk eject signal Input switch
(Y) Except for above. 5.0 V
ON

Revision: September 2014 AV-234 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
98
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON
Ignition C
105 Composite image signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(W) ground
ON
106 — Shield — — — — D

When DVD, USB or front E


Ignition
107 AUX image is displayed on
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(B) headrest display unit LH or
ON
RH.
F
SKIB2251J

121
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W) G
122
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
123
— USB D+ signal — — — —
H
(L)
124
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R) I
125 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
126
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Input switch — Battery voltage J
(B)
ON
127
— AM-FM main Input — — —
(B)
K
128
— FM sub Input — — —
(B)
Ignition L
129 Satellite radio antenna sig- Satellite antenna discon-
Ground Input switch 5.0 V
(B) nal nected.
ON
Ignition
130 GPS antenna disconnect- M
131 GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
(B) ed.
ON

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000011150361
AV
When the ambient temperature becomes extremely low or extremely high, AV control unit displays a message
and limits the function of the AV control unit.
O
FAIL-SAFE CONDITIONS
When the ambient temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or lower, or when it is 70°C (158°F) or higher.
Display P
The following messages are displayed during fail-safe:

Fail-safe mode Display


HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme low temperature.
When HDD temperature is low
Normal operation will resume when temperature rises.
HDD system is experiencing problems due to extreme high temperature.
When HDD temperature is high
Normal operation will resume when temperature drops.

Revision: September 2014 AV-235 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS

Function Fail-safe mode activated


Operation A/C and AV switch assembly can be operated.
Air conditioner • LEDs of A/C and AV switch assembly illuminate.
Display
• Temperature, mode and blower speed are displayed in a simplified mode.
Operation Only ON/OFF and volume control operations of A/C and AV switch assembly are available.
Audio
Display “Fail-safe mode” is displayed.
Operation Image tone cannot be controlled.
Camera
Display Cannot be superimposed. (warning display, tone control display)
Hands-free phone Operation Inoperative.
Navigation Operation Inoperative.
Self diagnosis Displays in a simplified mode.
CONSULT diagnosis Inoperative.

Ability Operation Mode


If HDD data can be read, “Fail-safe mode” is displayed and functions listed above can be operated.
DTC Index INFOID:0000000011150362

SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

CONSULT Display Reference Page


U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-313, "DTC Logic"
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-314, "DTC Logic"
U1200: CONT UNIT AV-315, "DTC Logic"
U1201: GYRO NO CONN AV-316, "DTC Logic"
U1202: G-SENSOR NO CONN AV-317, "DTC Logic"
U1204: GPS COMM AV-318, "DTC Logic"
U1205: GPS ROM AV-319, "DTC Logic"
U1206: GPS RAM AV-320, "DTC Logic"
U1207: GPS RTC AV-321, "DTC Logic"
U1216: CAN CONT AV-322, "DTC Logic"
U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE AV-323, "DTC Logic"
U1218: HDD CONN AV-324, "DTC Logic"
U1219: HDD READ AV-325, "DTC Logic"
U121A: HDD WRITE AV-326, "DTC Logic"
U121B: HDD COMM AV-327, "DTC Logic"
U121C: HDD ACCESS AV-328, "DTC Logic"
U121D: DSP CONN AV-329, "DTC Logic"
U121E: DSP COMM AV-330, "DTC Logic"
U1225: USB CONTROLLER AV-331, "DTC Logic"
U1227: DVD COMM AV-332, "DTC Logic"
U1228: SUB CPU CONN AV-333, "DTC Logic"
U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION AV-334, "DTC Logic"
U122A: CONFIG UNFINISH AV-335, "DTC Logic"
U122E: Built-in AUDIO CONN AV-336, "DTC Logic"
U1231: AMP TEMP AV-337, "DTC Logic"

Revision: September 2014 AV-236 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CONSULT Display Reference Page
A
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB AV-338, "DTC Logic"
U1243: FRONT DISP CONN AV-339, "DTC Logic"
U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-341, "DTC Logic" B
U1258: XM ANTENNA CONN AV-342, "DTC Logic"
U125A: 3RD DISP CONN AV-343, "DTC Logic"
U1263: USB OVERCURRENT AV-344, "DTC Logic" C
U1264: ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL (OPEN or SHORT) AV-345, "DTC Logic"
U1265: AMP ON TERMINAL (GND-SHORT or VB-SHORT) AV-346, "DTC Logic"
D
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1240: SWITCH CONN
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT E
• U124E: AMP CONN
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1246: VIDEO DIST CONN
F
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U125B: AROUND CAMERA CONN
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
G
• U125C: SONAR CONN
AV-347, "Description"
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1240: SWITCH CONN
• U125C: SONAR CONN H
• U125B: AROUND CAMERA CONN
• U1246: VIDEO DIST CONN
• U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT I
• U1240: SWITCH CONN
• U124E: AMP CONN
• U125C: SONAR CONN
• U125B: AROUND CAMERA CONN J
• U1246: VIDEO DIST CONN
U1310: CONTROL UNIT (AV) AV-356, "DTC Logic"
U1601: FL-DOOR WOOFER/TWEETER K
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT)
U1603: FL-DOOR WOOFER/TWEETER
(VB-SHOR) L
AV-357, "DTC Logic"
U1609: FR-DOOR WOOFER/TWEETER
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT)
U160B: FR-DOOR WOOFER/TWEETER M
(VB-SHOR)
U1627: F-INST L-TWEETER
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR) AV
AV-358, "DTC Logic"
U162F: F-INST R-TWEETER
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR)
U162A: F-INST C-SQAWK O
AV-359, "DTC Logic"
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR)
U1684: 2L-DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT) P
AV-360, "DTC Logic"
U168C: 2R-DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT)
U175D: R-LUGGAGE L-WOOFER
AV-361, "DTC Logic"
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR)

Revision: September 2014 AV-237 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CONSULT Display Reference Page
U176A: R-ROOF L-WK
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR)
AV-362, "DTC Logic"
U1772: R-ROOF R-WK
(OPEN, SHORT, GND-SHORT or VB-SHOR)

Revision: September 2014 AV-238 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150363

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

AWNIA1727ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output G
6 — Shield — — — —
7 — Shield — — — —
H

Ignition I
8 At camera image is dis-
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(B) played.
ON

J
SKIB2251J

K
Ignition
9 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Output switch
(B) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
L

PKIB5039J

Ignition
10 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch AV
(W) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON

PKIB5039J O
Ignition
11
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
P
Ignition
12
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON

Revision: September 2014 AV-239 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Ignition
18
Ground Composite image signal Input switch At DVD image is displayed.
(B)
ON

SKIB2251J

Ignition
19 Composite image signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(W) ground
ON

Ignition
20 Composite image synchro-
Ground Input switch —
(R) nizing signal
ON

SKIB0825E

22 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
23
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(P)
ACC

Revision: September 2014 AV-240 2015 Pathfinder


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
BOSE AMP.
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150364

TERMINAL LAYOUT B

AWNIA3776ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal F
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch G

H
1 2 Sound signal rear side
Output ON Sound output
(W) (G) speaker

I
SKIB3609E

4 3
Sound signal tweeter RH Output ON Sound output
(G) (W) K

SKIB3609E
L

5 6 M
Sound signal subwoofer 2 Output ON Sound output
(W) (G)

AV
SKIB3609E

7
— Ground — ON — 0V
(B)
O
10
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(LG)
11
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage P
(Y)
12
— Ground — ON — 0V
(B)

Revision: September 2014 AV-241 2015 Pathfinder


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch

13 8
Sound signal subwoofer 1 Output ON Sound output
(W) (B)

SKIB3609E

14 9 Sound signal rear door


Output ON Sound output
(G) (W) speaker RH

SKIB3609E

17 18 Sound signal center speak-


Output ON Sound output
(P) (R) er

SKIB3609E

Sound signal front door


19 20
speaker and front tweeter Output ON Sound output
(G) (R)
LH

SKIB3609E

21
Ground BOSE amp. ON signal Input ON — Battery voltage
(W)

24 23 Pre amp sound signal rear


Input ON Sound output
(B) (W) LH

SKIB3609E

26 25 Pre amp sound signal rear


Input ON Sound output
(B) (W) RH

SKIB3609E

Revision: September 2014 AV-242 2015 Pathfinder


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value A
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch
B

28 16 Sound signal rear door C


Output ON Sound output
(P) (R) speaker LH

SKIB3609E D

E
29 30
Sound signal tweeter LH Output ON Sound output
(R) (G)

F
SKIB3609E

Sound signal front door


31 32
speaker and front tweeter Output ON Sound output
(W) (P)
RH
H

SKIB3609E
I

33 34 Pre amp sound signal front J


Input ON Sound output
(B) (W) RH

K
SKIB3609E

L
35 36 Pre amp sound signal front
Input ON Sound output
(B) (W) LH
M

SKIB3609E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-243 2015 Pathfinder


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150365

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA3024ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
— Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V)
OFF
Ignition
3
— Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
4
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(W)
ACC
Ignition
5 Cont. ground for headrest
Ground — switch — 0V
(BR) display unit RH
ON
Ignition
switch — 3.3 V
6 ACC signal for headrest OFF
Ground Output
(L) display unit RH Ignition
switch — 0V
ACC
Ignition
7 Cont. ground for headrest
Ground — switch — 0V
(SB) display unit LH
ON
Ignition
switch — 3.3 V
8 ACC signal for headrest OFF
Ground Output
(BR) display unit LH Ignition
switch — 0V
ACC
When DVD, USB or front
AUX image is displayed on 0.5 V
Ignition headrest display unit RH.
9 Image switch signal for
Ground Input switch
(SB) headrest display unit RH When rear AUX image is
ON
displayed on headrest dis- 4.5 V
play unit RH.

Revision: September 2014 AV-244 2015 Pathfinder


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When DVD, USB or front B
AUX image is displayed on 0.5 V
Ignition headrest display unit LH.
10 Image switch signal for
Ground Input switch
(L) headrest display unit LH When rear AUX image is C
ON
displayed on headrest dis- 4.5 V
play unit LH.

Headphone sound signal Ignition Output headphone sound


14 15
RH for headrest display unit Output switch from headrest display unit E
(R) (G)
RH ON RH to headphone.

SKIB3609E
F

Headphone sound signal Ignition Output headphone sound G


16 17
LH for headrest display unit Output switch from headrest display unit
(B) (W)
RH ON RH to headphone.

H
SKIB3609E

Ignition
18 AV ground for headrest dis-
Ground — switch — 0V I
(V) play unit RH
ON
Ignition
19 AV ground for headrest dis-
Ground — switch — 0V
(V) play unit LH
ON
J

K
Headphone sound signal Ignition Output headphone sound
20 21
RH for headrest display unit Output switch from headrest display unit
(B) (G)
LH ON LH to headphone.
L

SKIB3609E

Headphone sound signal Ignition Output headphone sound


22 23
LH for headrest display unit Output switch from headrest display unit AV
(W) (R)
LH ON LH to headphone.

SKIB3609E
O
Composite image signal Ignition
27
Ground ground for headrest display — switch — 0V
(W)
unit RH ON
P

When DVD, USB, front


Ignition
28 Composite image signal for AUX or rear AUX image is
Ground Output switch
(B) headrest display unit RH displayed on headrest dis-
ON
play unit RH.

SKIB2251J

Revision: September 2014 AV-245 2015 Pathfinder


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
29 — Shield — — — —
30 — Shield — — — —
Composite image signal Ignition
31
Ground ground for headrest display — switch — 0V
(P)
unit LH ON

When DVD, USB, front


Ignition
32 Composite image signal for AUX or rear AUX image is
Ground Output switch
(L) headrest display unit LH displayed on headrest dis-
ON
play unit LH.

SKIB2251J

Ignition
33 Composite image signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(W) ground
ON

When DVD, USB or front


Ignition
34 AUX image is displayed on
Ground Composite image signal Input switch
(B) headrest display unit LH or
ON
RH.

SKIB2251J

35 — Shield — — — —

Ignition When rear AUX image is


40 39
AUX image signal Input switch displayed on headrest dis-
(B) (W)
ON play unit LH or RH.

SKIB2251J

41 — Shield — — — —

When DVD, USB or front


Ignition
45 46 AUX mode is selected on
Sound signal LH Input switch
(W) (R) headrest display unit LH or
ON
RH.

SKIB3609E

When DVD, USB or front


Ignition
47 48 AUX mode is selected on
Sound signal RH Input switch
(B) (G) headrest display unit LH or
ON
RH.

SKIB3609E

49 — Shield — — — —
53 — Shield — — — —

Revision: September 2014 AV-246 2015 Pathfinder


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

Ignition When rear AUX mode is


54 56 C
AUX sound signal LH Input switch selected on headrest dis-
(B) (W)
ON play unit LH or RH.

SKIB3609E D

E
Ignition When rear AUX mode is
55 56
AUX sound signal RH Input switch selected on headrest dis-
(R) (W)
ON play unit LH or RH.
F
SKIB3609E

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-247 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150366

TERMINAL LAYOUT

ALNIA1528ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Driver Seat

Terminal Condi-
Description
(Wire color) tion Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch

1 17 Headphone sound signal


Input ON Headphone sound output
(W) (B) LH

SKIB3609E

2 18 Headphone sound signal


Input ON Headphone sound output
(G) (R) RH

SKIB3609E

3 Headphone sound signal


— — — —
(LG) shield

When DVD, USB or front


5
Ground Composite image signal Input ON AUX image is displayed on
(Y)
headrest display unit

SKIB2251J

When DVD, USB or front


AUX image is displayed on 0.5 V
7 headrest display unit
Ground Image switch signal Output ON
(W) When rear AUX image is
displayed on headrest dis- 4.5 V
play unit

8 OFF — 3.3 V
Ground ACC signal Input
(G) ACC — 0V

Revision: September 2014 AV-248 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal Condi-
Description
(Wire color) tion Reference value A
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch
10 AV communication signal 1 Input/ B
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
11 AV communication signal 1 Input/
— — — —
(P) (H) Output C
12
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(G)
13 D
Ground Illumination Input OFF — Battery voltage
(BR)
15
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(W) E
16
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(W)
19 F
Ground AV ground — ON — 0V
(V)
20 Composite image signal
— — — — —
(P) shield
G
21 Composite image signal
Ground — ON — 0V
(G) ground
23 H
Ground Control ground — ON — 0V
(Y)
24 Input/
— CON CK B — — —
(SB) Output
I
26 AV communication signal 2 Input/
— — — —
(R) (L) Output
27 AV communication signal 2 Input/ J
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
29 Input/
— CON CK A — — —
(GR) Output
K
31
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(G)
32
Ground Ground — ON — 0V L
(G)

Passenger Seat
M

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-249 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal Condi-
Description
(Wire color) tion Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch

1 17 Headphone sound signal


Input ON Headphone sound output
(W) (B) LH

SKIB3609E

2 18 Headphone sound signal


Input ON Headphone sound output
(G) (R) RH

SKIB3609E

3 Headphone sound signal


— — — —
(LG) shield

When DVD, USB or front


5
Ground Composite image signal Input ON AUX image is displayed on
(Y)
headrest display unit

SKIB2251J

When DVD, USB or front


AUX image is displayed on 0.5 V
7 headrest display unit
Ground Image switch signal Output ON
(W) When rear AUX image is
displayed on headrest dis- 4.5 V
play unit

8 OFF — 3.3 V
Ground ACC signal Input
(G) ACC — 0V
10 AV communication signal 1 Input/
— — — —
(LG) (L) Output
11 AV communication signal 1 Input/
— — — —
(P) (H) Output
13
Ground Illumination Input OFF — Battery voltage
(BR)
15
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(W)
16
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(W)
19
Ground AV ground — ON — 0V
(V)
20 Composite image signal
— — — — —
(P) shield
21 Composite image signal
Ground — ON — 0V
(G) ground
23
Ground Control ground — ON — 0V
(Y)

Revision: September 2014 AV-250 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal Condi-
Description
(Wire color) tion Reference value A
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch
24 Input/ B
— CON CK B — — —
(SB) Output
26 AV communication signal 2 Input/
— — — —
(R) (L) Output C
27 AV communication signal 2 Input/
— — — —
(LG) (H) Output
28 D
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(G)
29 Input/
— CON CK A — — —
(GR) Output E
31
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(G)
32 F
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(G)

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-251 2015 Pathfinder


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011150367

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status


CAMERA switch ON. Off
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL
CAMERA switch OFF. On
CAMERA switch OFF. Off
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
CAMERA switch ON. On
Side camera LH inoperative. NG
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera LH operative. OK
Front camera inoperative. NG
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Front camera operative. OK
Side camera RH inoperative. NG
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera RH operative. OK
Rear view camera inoperative. NG
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Rear view camera operative. OK
When selector lever is in any position other than R (reverse). Off
REVERSE SIGNAL
When selector lever in R (reverse). On
Around view monitor control unit is not receiving steering angle
Off
sensor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
Around view monitor control unit is receiving steering angle sen-
On
sor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE Steering angle sensor type. Absolute
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE Steering gear ratio type. Type O
Left hand drive vehicle. LHD
STEERING POSITION
Right hand drive vehicle. RHD
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading mph, km/h

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA2812ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Revision: September 2014 AV-252 2015 Pathfinder


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Terminal A
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
C
Ignition
2
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
3 D
— Signal ground — — — —
(G)
Ignition
4
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage E
(LG)
ON
5
— RX — — — —
(P) F
7
— TX — — — —
(BG)
Ignition R position Battery voltage G
8
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(LG) Other than R position 0V
ON
10 H
— V-CAN (L) — — — —
(P)
12
— V-CAN (H) — — — —
(L)
I
19 — Shield — — — —
20
— External video output — — — —
(B)
J
23 — Shield — — — —

K
Ignition
24
Ground Camera image signal Output switch At camera image display
(B)
ON L

SKIB2251J

Ignition M
25
Ground Rear view camera ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition AV
26 Rear view camera power sup- “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Output switch 6.0 V
(W) ply shift position is “R”.
ON

Ignition
28 Rear view camera image sig- “CAMERA” switch is ON or
27 Input switch
(R) nal
ON
shift position is “R”. P

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
29 Side camera driver side
Ground — switch — 0V
(B) ground
ON

Revision: September 2014 AV-253 2015 Pathfinder


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
30 Side camera driver side power “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Output switch 6.0 V
(W) supply shift position is “R”.
ON

Ignition
32 Side camera driver side image “CAMERA” switch is ON or
31 Input switch
(R) signal shift position is “R”.
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
33 Side camera passenger side
Ground — switch — 0V
(B) ground
ON
Ignition
34 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Output switch 6.0 V
(W) power supply shift position is “R”.
ON

Ignition
36 Side camera passenger side “CAMERA” switch is ON or
35 Input switch
(R) image signal shift position is “R”.
ON

JSNIA0834GB

Ignition
37
Ground Front camera ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
38 “CAMERA” switch is ON or
Ground Front camera power supply Output switch 6.0 V
(R) shift position is “R”.
ON

Ignition
40 “CAMERA” switch is ON or
39 Front camera image signal Input switch
(W) shift position is “R”.
ON

JSNIA0834GB

DTC Index INFOID:0000000011150368

CONSULT Display Reference Page


U1302: CAMERA SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ABNORMALITY AV-348, "DTC Logic"
U1303: LED SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ABNORMALITY AV-352, "DTC Logic"
U1304: NON-COMPLETION OF THE CALIBRATION AV-354, "DTC Logic"
U1305: NON-COMPLETION OF THE WRITE CONFIGURATION AV-355, "DTC Logic"

Revision: September 2014 AV-254 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011150369
B

AV

ABNWA2584GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-255 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNWA2585GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-256 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNWA2586GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-257 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNWA2587GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-258 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNWA2588GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-259 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNWA2589GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-260 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNWA2590GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-261 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNWA2591GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-262 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7083GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-263 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7084GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-264 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7085GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-265 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7086GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-266 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7087GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-267 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7088GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-268 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7089GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-269 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7090GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-270 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7091GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-271 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7092GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-272 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7093GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-273 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7094GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-274 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7095GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-275 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7096GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-276 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7097GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-277 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7098GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-278 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7099GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-279 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7100GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-280 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7101GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-281 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7102GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-282 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7103GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-283 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7104GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-284 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7105GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-285 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7106GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-286 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7107GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-287 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7108GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-288 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7109GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-289 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7110GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-290 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7111GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-291 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7112GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-292 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7113GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-293 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7114GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-294 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7115GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-295 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7116GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-296 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7117GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-297 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7118GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-298 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV

ABNIA7119GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-299 2015 Pathfinder


PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

ABNIA7120GB

Revision: September 2014 AV-300 2015 Pathfinder


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000011150370
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

AWNIA2486GB M
Reference 1: Refer to AV-226, "CONSULT Function".
Reference 2: Refer to AV-409, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW AV
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. O
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
P

>> GO TO 2
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS (CONSULT)
1. Connect CONSULT and perform “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “MULTI AV”.
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Revision: September 2014 AV-301 2015 Pathfinder
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Is any DTC No. displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 4
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (CONSULT)
1. Check the DTC No. indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC No. list. Refer to AV-236, "DTC Index".
NOTE:
Start with the diagnosis for the CAN communication system if “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] or CONTROL
UNIT (CAN) [U1010]” is displayed.

>> GO TO 5
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-409, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC No. has
been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.

>> GO TO 6
6.CHECK AFTER REPAIR
1. Perform self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT after repairing or replacing the malfunctioning
parts.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is any DTC No. displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 7
7.FINAL CHECK
Perform the operation check to confirm that the malfunction symptom is solved or that any other symptoms
are present.
Are any symptoms present?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: September 2014 AV-302 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000011150371 B

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before C
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac- D
ing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: E
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. F

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure


INFOID:0000000011150372
G
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT H
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
I
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing AV control unit.

J
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". K

>> GO TO 3.
L
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration". M
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to AV-304, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura- AV
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-304, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
O
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK P
Check that the operation of the AV control unit is normal.

>> Work End.


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Revision: September 2014 AV-303 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000011150373

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows:

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
"Before Replace ECU"
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU"
with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new AV control unit.
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000011150374

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION


CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.

>> Work End.


3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-305, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Configuration List".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con-
figuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized.
5. When "Completed", select "End".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.

Revision: September 2014 AV-304 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
>> Work End.
A
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000011150375

CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal B
control of ECU.

MANUAL SETTING ITEM C


Items Setting value
ENGINE TYPE NORMAL ⇔ HYBRID
SOUND SYSTEM BOSE SURROUND ⇔ BOSE ⇔ BASE D
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON- E
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL F
UNIT : Description INFOID:0000000011150376

BEFORE REPLACEMENT G
When replacing around view monitor control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT
configuration before replacement.
NOTE:
H
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing around view monitor control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT I
CAUTION:
When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CON-
SULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order. J
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
K
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000011150377

L
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
-CONSULT
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle M
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing around view monitor control unit. AV

>> GO TO 2.
O
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
P
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration".
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
Revision: September 2014 AV-305 2015 Pathfinder
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
specification. Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura-
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR
CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the around view monitor control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and
predictive course lines) are normal.

>> Work End.


CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Description
INFOID:0000000011150378

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing around view
monitor control unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows:

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current around view monitor control unit.
"Before Replace ECU"
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION:
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or
"After Replace ECU" with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new around view monitor
control unit.
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000011150379

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION


CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of around view monitor control unit.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.

>> Work End.


3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.

Revision: September 2014 AV-306 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-307, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List". A
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
B
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con- C
figuration of brand new around view monitor control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized.
5. When "Completed", select "End". D

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK E
Confirm that each function controlled by around view monitor control unit operates normally.

F
>> Work End.
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List
INFOID:0000000011150380 G
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU. H

MANUAL SETTING ITEM


Items Setting value I
BCI FUNCTION WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
J
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000011150381 K

Adjust the center position of the predictive course line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure L
INFOID:0000000011150382

1.DRIVING M
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.

>> END AV
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description O
INFOID:0000000011150383

• Calibration must be performed after removing/replacing the cameras, removing parts (e.g. front grille, door
mirror, and others) mounted on the cameras, or replacing the Around view monitor control unit. P
• The use of CONSULT is required to perform calibration or writing of calibration results to the Around view
monitor control unit.
• Align the white lines on the road near the vehicle at the boundary of each camera image by this camera cal-
ibration. The white lines far from the vehicle may not be aligned at the boundary of each camera image. The
farther the line, the greater the difference is.

Revision: September 2014 AV-307 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000011150384

CALIBRATION FLOWCHART
Following the flowchart shown in the figure, perform the calibration.

JSNIA4210GB

NOTE:
View in the incomplete calibration state is indicated by “ ” on the
around view monitor.

AWNIA2590GB

CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1.AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN CONFIRMATION
Check that there is no indication of “Incomplete calibration”.
Is the “Incomplete calibration” display visible?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.

AWNIA2590GB

2.CHECK THAT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED


Revision: September 2014 AV-308 2015 Pathfinder
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Check that the around view monitor control unit is replaced.
Is the around view monitor control unit replaced? A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CANCEL THE INDICATION OF INCOMPLETE CALIBRATION (PERFORM THIS ONLY AFTER REPLAC- B
ING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT.)
CONSULT work support C
1. On the CONSULT screen, touch “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING
CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”, or
“CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)” to accept the selection.
NOTE: D
To cancel the indication of Incomplete calibration, select items based on the target camera.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, touch “APPLY” but-
ton. After this, touch “OK” button. E
CAUTION:
• Never perform operations other than those mentioned
above.
• Never perform “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”. F
3. Display the around view monitor screen to check that there is no
errors, such as deviations among the camera images.
Is there a malfunction? G
YES >> Calibration end
NO >> GO TO 1. JSNIA4212ZZ

4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” H

1. Put target line 1 on the ground beside each axle using packing tape, etc.
2. Put target lines 2 equal to the vehicle total length + approximately 1.0 m (39.3 in) from the vehicle side
I
(right and left) at approximately 30 cm (11.8 in) away from the vehicle (make the line as parallel with the
vehicle as possible)
Preparation of simplified target line J

AV

JSNIA0927ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 O


A. Approx. 30 cm (11.8 in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.3 in)

3. CONSULT work support P


Touch “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” on the CONSULT screen.
4. On the CONSULT screen, touch “SELECT” button to select right or left camera and perform camera cali-
bration as instructed below:
- If the marker on the screen deviates from Target line 1, touch “AXIS X” button and “AXIS Y” button to
adjust so that the marker is placed on the Target line 1.
- If Target line 2 is misaligned among the cameras, adjust each camera image to bring Target line 2 into a
straight line.
CAUTION:
Revision: September 2014 AV-309 2015 Pathfinder
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Never adjust the front camera and rear view camera. Only adjust the right and left cameras.
Simplified target line adjustment method

JSNIA0929ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1


Crosshairs cursor (mark indicated
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)

5. Adjust right and left cameras. Touch "APPLY" on the CONSULT screen to display adjustment results.
6. After adjusting right and left cameras, check that the marker is properly placed on the screen and there is
no deviation in Target line 1.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled on this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
Is the difference corrected?
YES >> On the CONSULT screen, touch “OK” button to complete writing to the around view monitor con-
trol unit.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0, RM0 (mark) on the ground at the
center of the vehicle front end and rear end with white packing tape or a pen.
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix it on the point approximately 1.0 m (39.9 in)
to the front and rear of the vehicle through the points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 1

AWNIA2866ZZ

Revision: September 2014 AV-310 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark) A


4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string

3. Put the points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.5 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually.
4. Route the vinyl string through the points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately B
1.5 m (59 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put the points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) to both right and left [vehicle width / 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)] from the
points FM and RM. C
Target line preparation procedure 2

JSNIA0921ZZ H

1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale


4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
I
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.8 in)
A. 75 cm (29.5 in) B. Approx. 1.5 m (59 in) C. [Vehicle width/ 2 + 30 cm (11.8 in)
from the points FM and RM] J

6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with vinyl string, and fix it with packing tape.
7. Put a mark on the center of each axle, draw vertical lines to the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR
K
from the marks on the center of the axle using a triangle scale, and then fix the lines using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 3
L

AV

P
JSNIA0922ZZ

1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL


4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale

Perform “Calibrating Camera Image”


CONSULT work support

Revision: September 2014 AV-311 2015 Pathfinder


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
1. On the CONSULT screen, touch “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING
CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”, “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”, or
“CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)” to accept the selection.
NOTE:
To cancel the indication of Incomplete calibration, select items based on the target camera.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button, and
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground.

Adjustment range
Rotation direction (Center dial) : 31 patterns (16 on the center)
Upper/lower direction (upper/lower
: −22 – 22
switch)
Left/right direction (left/right switch) : −22 – 22
JSNIA4212ZZ
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera screen.
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.

>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that could not be aligned in the
“Calibrating Camera Image” mode.
CONSULT work support
1. Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” by touching CONSULT screen.
2. On the adjustment screen of each camera, adjust the parameter
by touching the “AXIS X” button, “AXIS Y” button”, and
“ROTATE” button to place the calibration marker shown on the
camera screen on the target line drawn on the ground.
NOTE:
Touch “SELECT” button on the CONSULT screen to select the
target camera.
3. Touch “APPLY” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is
displayed and adjustment results are shown on the camera
screen.
CAUTION:
JSNIA4214ZZ
Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Do never perform other
operations while “PRCSNG” is displayed.
4. Touch “OK” button on the CONSULT screen. “PRCSNG” is displayed and adjustment results are written to
the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Check that “PRCSNG” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “PRCSNG” is dis-
played.
• After pressing the “OK” button, never press buttons other than the “BACK” button.
NOTE:
• It can be initialized to the NISSAN factory default condition with “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.
• The adjustment value is cancelled in this mode by performing “Initialize Camera Image Calibration”.

>> Calibration end

Revision: September 2014 AV-312 2015 Pathfinder


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150385
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


C
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000] D
more.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150386

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


F
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed? G
YES >> Refer to LAN-21, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
H

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-313 2015 Pathfinder


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150387

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction oc-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. curs constantly.
[U1010]
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-314 2015 Pathfinder


U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150388

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
CONT UNIT
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1200] C
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-315 2015 Pathfinder


U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150389

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
GYRO NO CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1201]
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-316 2015 Pathfinder


U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1202 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150390

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
G-SENSOR NO CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1202] C
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-317 2015 Pathfinder


U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150391

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


An intermittent error caused by strong radio inter-
ference, GPS reception error, etc. may be detect-
GPS CONN ed.
GPS malfunction is detected.
[U1204] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150392

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U1204 detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: September 2014 AV-318 2015 Pathfinder


U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1205 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150393

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
An intermittent error caused by strong radio inter-
ference, GPS reception error, etc. may be detect-
C
GPS ROM ed.
GPS malfunction is detected.
[U1205] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150394

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E

1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.


2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again. F
Is DTC U1205 detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident". G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-319 2015 Pathfinder


U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1206 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150395

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


An intermittent error caused by strong radio inter-
ference, GPS reception error, etc. may be detect-
GPS RAM ed.
GPS malfunction is detected.
[U1206] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150396

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U1206 detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: September 2014 AV-320 2015 Pathfinder


U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1207 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150397

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
An intermittent error caused by strong radio inter-
ference, GPS reception error, etc. may be detect-
C
GPS RTC ed.
GPS malfunction is detected.
[U1207] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150398

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E

1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.


2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again. F
Is DTC U1207 detected?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident". G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-321 2015 Pathfinder


U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150399

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
CAN CONT
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1216]
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-322 2015 Pathfinder


U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150400

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
BLUETOOTH MODULE
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1217] C
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-323 2015 Pathfinder


U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150401

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
HDD CONN tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U1218] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-324 2015 Pathfinder


U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150402

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
C
HDD READ tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U1219] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-325 2015 Pathfinder


U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150403

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
HDD WRITE tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121A] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-326 2015 Pathfinder


U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150404

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
C
HDD COMM tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121B] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-327 2015 Pathfinder


U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150405

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning normal-
ly, there is a possibility of an intermittent malfunc-
HDD ACCESS tion.
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
[U121C] Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-328 2015 Pathfinder


U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150406

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DSP CONN C
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U121D]
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150407

1.CHECK CD PLAYBACK E
Check the CD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the CD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally? F
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-329 2015 Pathfinder


U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150408

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DSP COMM
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U121E]
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150409

1.CHECK CD PLAYBACK
Check the CD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the CD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally?
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-330 2015 Pathfinder


U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150410

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
USB CONTROLLER Check that connection to USB connector is nor-
USB connection malfunction is detected.
[U1225] mal.
C

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-331 2015 Pathfinder


U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150411

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


An intermittent error causing disc player malfunc-
tion may be detected.
DVD COMM
AV control unit malfunction is detected. Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
[U1227]
stantly.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150412

1.CHECK DVD PLAYBACK


Check the DVD playback operation of the AV control unit. Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating
instructions.
Is the DVD playback function of the AV control unit operating normally?
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-332 2015 Pathfinder


U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150413

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
SUB CPU CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1228] C
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-333 2015 Pathfinder


U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150414

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
iPod CERTIFICATION
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U1229]
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-334 2015 Pathfinder


U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150415

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Write configuration data.
CONFIG UNFINISH Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND
Configuration data is incomplete. C
[U122A] VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150416


D

1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
When U122A is detected, configuration data must be written. E

>> Write configuration data with CONSULT. Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure". F

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-335 2015 Pathfinder


U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150417

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
Built-in AUDIO CONN
AV control unit malfunction is detected. stantly.
[U122E]
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-336 2015 Pathfinder


U1231 BOSE AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1231 BOSE AMP.
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150418

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
Replace BOSE speaker amp. if malfunction oc-
AMP TEMP
BOSE speaker amp. malfunction is detected. curs constantly.
[U1231] C
Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-337 2015 Pathfinder


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150419

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment Adjust predictive course line center position of
[U1232] of steering angle sensor is incomplete. steering angle sensor.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150420

1.ADJUST PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR


When U1232 is detected, the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor needs to be
adjusted.

>> Adjust the predictive course line center position of steering angle sensor. Refer to AV-307, "PRE-
DICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure".

Revision: September 2014 AV-338 2015 Pathfinder


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150421

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
When any of the following is detected.
• display unit power supply or ground circuit • Display unit power supply and ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN C
malfunction. • Serial communication circuits between front
[U1243]
• serial communication circuit malfunction be- display unit and AV control unit.
tween front display unit and AV control unit.
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150422

E
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F

Check display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-363, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
H
2.CHECK COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector M92 and AV control unit connector M163. I
3. Check continuity between display unit connector M92 terminals 9, 10 and AV control unit connector M163
terminals 77, 61.
J
Display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
9 77 K
M92 M163 Yes
10 61
4. Check continuity between display unit connector M92 terminals 9, 10 and ground. L

Display unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal M
9
M92 — No
10
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
O
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (CONT→DISP)
1. Connect display unit connector M92 and AV control unit connector M163.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. P
3. Check signal between display unit connector M92 terminal 9 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-339 2015 Pathfinder


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Display unit Ground


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

When adjusting dis-


M92 9 —
play brightness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DISP→CONT)
Check signal between display unit connector M92 terminal 10 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

When adjusting dis-


M92 10 —
play brightness.

PKIB5039J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-429, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-340 2015 Pathfinder


U1244 GPS ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150423

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
GPS ANTENNA CONN GPS antenna connection malfunction is detect-
GPS antenna disconnection.
[U1244] ed.
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150424

D
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

E
1.GPS ANTENNA INSPECTION
Visually inspect the GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-451, "Removal and Installation".
Is inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning parts.
G
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. H
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M25 and ground.

AV control unit Ground I


(+) Voltage
(−)
Connector Terminal
M25 130 — 5.0 V J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Inspection End. K
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-341 2015 Pathfinder


U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150425

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


XM ANTENNA CONN Satellite radio antenna connection malfunction is
Satellite radio antenna disconnection.
[U1258] detected.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150426

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA INSPECTION


Visually inspect the satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas".
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M156.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector and ground.

AV control unit Ground


(+) Voltage
(−)
Connector Terminal
M156 129 — 5.0 V
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-342 2015 Pathfinder


U125A HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U125A HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150427

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
When any of the following is detected.
• Headrest display unit power supply and ground
• headrest display unit power supply or ground
3RD DISP CONN circuits. C
circuit malfunction.
[U125A] • AV communication circuits between headrest
• AV communication circuit malfunction be-
display units.
tween headrest display units.
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150428

E
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F

Check headrest display unit power supply and ground circuits. Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
: Diagnosis Procedure".
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
H
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect headrest display unit connectors. I
3. Check continuity between headrest display unit (driver seat) connector B223 and headrest display unit
(passenger seat) connector B317.
J
Headrest display unit (driver seat) Headrest display unit (passenger seat)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
26 11 K
B223 B317 Yes
27 10
4. Check continuity between headrest display unit (driver seat) connector B223 and ground. L

Headrest display unit (driver seat)


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal M
26
B223 — No
27
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace headrest display unit (passenger seat). Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
O

Revision: September 2014 AV-343 2015 Pathfinder


U1263 USB
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1263 USB
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150429

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


USB OVERCURRENT Check USB harness between the AV control unit
Overcurrent in USB connector is detected.
[U126] and USB connector.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150430

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS


Visually inspect USB interface harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-440, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
Check USB interface harness continuity. Refer to AV-402, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-440, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-344 2015 Pathfinder


U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150431

B
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL Antenna amp. ON signal circuit open or short cir- Antenna amp. ON signal circuit between AV con-
[U1264] cuited. trol unit and antenna amp.
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150432

D
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

E
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA BASE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M141 and antenna base connector M502. F
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M141 and antenna base connector M502.

AV control unit Antenna base G


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M141 126 M502 2 Yes
H
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M141 and ground.

AV control unit I
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 126 — No
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
K
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M141.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M141 and ground.

AV control unit Ground M


Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
AV
M141 126 — Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas". O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-345 2015 Pathfinder


U1265 BOSE AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1265 BOSE AMP.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150433

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


AMP ON TERMINAL BOSE amp. ON signal circuit open or short cir- BOSE amp. ON signal circuit between AV control
[U1265] cuited. unit and BOSE speaker amp.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150434

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND BOSE SPEAKER AMP.


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and Bose speaker amp. connector B130.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and Bose speaker amp. connector B130.

AV control unit Bose speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M161 1 B130 21 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M161 1 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit Ground


Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M161 1 — Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-346 2015 Pathfinder


U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000011150435

U1300 is indicated when a malfunction occurs in the communication signal of the multi AV system. Indicated B
simultaneously, without fail, the malfunction of control units connected to the AV control unit through communi-
cation circuits. Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT DISPLAY ITEM C

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause

When any of the following is detected:


• A/C and AV switch assembly power supply and D
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
• A/C and AV switch assembly power supply or
[U1300] Refer to AV-365, "A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEM-
ground circuit malfunction.
• SWITCH CONN BLY : Diagnosis Procedure".
• AV communication circuit malfunction between AV E
[U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV control
control unit and A/C and AV switch assembly.
unit and A/C and AV switch assembly.
• BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground cir-
When any of the following is detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT cuits. F
• BOSE speaker amp. power supply or ground circuit
[U1300] Refer to AV-364, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
malfunction.
• AMP CONN dure".
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit
[U124E] • AV communication circuits between AV control
and BOSE speaker amp. are malfunctioning.
unit and BOSE speaker amp. G
• Video distributor power supply and ground cir-
cuits.
When any of the following is detected:
Refer to AV-366, "VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diag- H
• video distributor power supply or ground circuit mal-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT nosis Procedure".
function.
[U1300] • Headrest display unit (driver seat) power supply
• headrest display unit (driver seat) power supply or
• VIDEO DIST CONN and ground circuits.
ground circuit malfunction.
[U1246] Refer to AV-367, "HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT : I
• AV communication circuit malfunction between AV
Diagnosis Procedure".
control unit and headrest display unit (driver seat).
• AV communication circuits between AV control
unit and headrest display unit (driver seat).
J
• Around view monitor control unit power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When any of the following is detected:
and ground circuits.
[U1300] • around view monitor control unit power supply or
Refer to AV-368, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR
• AROUND CAMERA ground circuit malfunction.
CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". K
CONN • AV communication circuit malfunction between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV control
[U125B] control unit and around view monitor control unit.
unit and around view monitor control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
L
[U1300]
• SWITCH CONN
[U1240]
• AROUND CAMERA M
CONN
[U125B]
• VIDEO DIST CONN
[U1246] AV
• AV COMM CIRCUIT AV communication circuit malfunction between AV AV communication circuits between AV control unit
[U1300] control unit and A/C and AV switch assembly. and A/C and AV switch assembly.
• SWITCH CONN O
[U1240]
• AMP CONN
[U124E]
• AROUND CAMERA P
CONN
[U125B]
• VIDEO DIST CONN
[U1246]

Revision: September 2014 AV-347 2015 Pathfinder


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150436

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


CAMERA SUPPLY POWER
• Harness or connectors.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE ABNOR-
Short in camera power circuit. • Camera.
MALITY
• Around view monitor control unit.
[U1302]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150437

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK CAMERA DATA MONITOR


Check "REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL", "F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL", "DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG",
"PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG" in “DATA MONITOR” of “AVM”.
Is “OK” displayed for all cameras?
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-1 (Front camera)>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 (Rear view camera)>>GO TO 4.
NO-3 (LH side camera)>>GO TO 6.
NO-4 (RH side camera)>>GO TO 8.
2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and camera connectors.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and front camera connector
E226.

Around view monitor control unit Front camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
38 1
M96 E226 Yes
37 2
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 38 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and front camera connector E226.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Revision: September 2014 AV-348 2015 Pathfinder


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Around view monitor control unit M97 A


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
B
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
38 37 6.0 V
position is R.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-444, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINU- D
ITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connector D504. E
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connec-
tor D504.
F
Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
25 2 G
M96 D504 Yes
26 1
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground. H

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal I
M96 26 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE K
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connector D504.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96. L

Around view monitor control unit M96


Voltage M
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
26 25 6.0 V AV
position is R.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-445, "Removal and Installation".
O
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector
D28.

Around view monitor control unit LH side camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-349 2015 Pathfinder


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
30 6
M96 D28 Yes
29 18
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 30 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
7.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Around view monitor control unit M96


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
30 29 6.0 V
position is R.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector
D128.

Around view monitor control unit RH side camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
34 6
M96 D128 Yes
33 18
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 34 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
9.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Revision: September 2014 AV-350 2015 Pathfinder


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Around view monitor control unit M96 A


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
B
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
34 33 6.0 V
position is R.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace RH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-351 2015 Pathfinder


U1303 LED POWER SUPPLY VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1303 LED POWER SUPPLY VOLT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150438

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


LED SUPPLY POWER SUP-
• Harness or connectors.
PLY VOLTAGE ABNORMAL-
Short in camera power circuit. • Camera.
ITY
• Around view monitor control unit.
[U1303]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150439

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK CAMERA DATA MONITOR


Check "DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG", "PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG" in “DATA MONITOR” of “AVM”.
Is “OK” displayed for all cameras?
YES >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-1 (LH side camera)>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 (RH side camera)>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector
D28.

Around view monitor control unit LH side camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
30 6
M96 D28 Yes
29 18
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 30 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Revision: September 2014 AV-352 2015 Pathfinder


U1303 LED POWER SUPPLY VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Around view monitor control unit M96 A


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
B
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
30 29 6.0 V
position is R.
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector E
D128.

Around view monitor control unit RH side camera F


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
34 6
M96 D128 Yes G
33 18
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.
H
Around view monitor control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 34 — No I

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128. K
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between around the terminals of view monitor control unit connector M96.
L
Around view monitor control unit M96
Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
M
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
34 33 6.0 V
position is R.
AV
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace RH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
O

Revision: September 2014 AV-353 2015 Pathfinder


U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150440

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


NON-COMPLETION OF Cameras are not calibrated. Refer to AV-308, "CAL-
THE CALIBRATION Camera calibration malfunction. IBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
[U1304] MONITOR) : Work Procedure".

Revision: September 2014 AV-354 2015 Pathfinder


U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150441

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


C
NON-COMPLETION OF Around view monitor control unit not configurated.
THE WRITE CONFIGURA- Around view monitor control unit configuration Refer to AV-306, "CONFIGURATION (AROUND
TION malfunction. VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT) : Work Proce-
[U1305] dure". D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-355 2015 Pathfinder


U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150442

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs con-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV com-
stantly.
[U1310] munication circuit.
Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-356 2015 Pathfinder


U1601, U1603, U1609, U160B FRONT DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1601, U1603, U1609, U160B FRONT DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150443

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


FL-DOOR WOOFER C
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- When any of the following is detected:
amp. and front door speaker LH.
SHORT) • Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
Refer to AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1601] speaker amp. and front door speaker LH.
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker D
FL-DOOR WOOFER • Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and front tweeter LH.
(VB-SHOR] speaker amp. and front tweeter LH.
Refer to AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1603]
FR-DOOR WOOFER E
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- When any of the following is detected:
amp. and front door speaker RH.
SHORT) • Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
Refer to AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1609] speaker amp. and front door speaker RH.
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker F
FR-DOOR WOOFER • Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and front tweeter RH.
(VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and front tweeter RH.
Refer to AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U160B]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150444


G

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


H
1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U1601, U1603, U1609 or U160B detected? I
YES >> Refer to AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door speaker) or AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(front tweeter).
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident". J

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-357 2015 Pathfinder


U1627, U162F TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1627, U162F TWEETER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150445

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


F-INST L-TWEETER
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker amp.
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
and instrument panel tweeter LH.
SHORT or VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and instrument panel tweeter LH.
Refer to AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1627]
F-INST R-TWEETER
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker amp.
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
and instrument panel tweeter RH.
SHORT or VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and instrument panel tweeter RH.
Refer to AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U162F]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150446

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U1627 or U162F detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: September 2014 AV-358 2015 Pathfinder


U162A CENTER SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U162A CENTER SPEAKER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150447

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


F-INST C-SQUAWK C
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and center speaker.
SHORT, or VB-SHORT) speaker amp. and center speaker.
Refer to AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U162A]
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150448

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again. F
Is DTC U162A detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident". G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-359 2015 Pathfinder


U1684, U168C REAR DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U1684, U168C REAR DOOR SPEAKER/TWEETER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150449

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


2L-DOOR SPEAKER
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker amp.
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
and rear door speaker LH.
SHORT) speaker amp. and rear door speaker LH is detected:
Refer to AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1684]
2R-DOOR SPEAKER
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker amp.
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
and rear door speaker RH.
SHORT) speaker amp. and rear door speaker RH is detected:
Refer to AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U168C]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150450

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U1684 or U168C detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: September 2014 AV-360 2015 Pathfinder


U175D WOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U175D WOOFER
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150451

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


R-LUGGAGE L-WOOFER C
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and subwoofer.
SHORT or VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and subwoofer.
Refer to AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U175D]
D
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150452

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again. F
Is DTC U175D detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident". G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-361 2015 Pathfinder


U176A, U1772 ROOF SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
U176A, U1772 ROOF SPEAKER
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000011150453

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause


R-ROOF L-SQAWK
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and rear side speaker LH.
SHORT or VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and rear side speaker LH.
Refer to AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U176A]
R-ROOF R-SQAWK
Sound signal circuits between BOSE speaker
(OPEN, SHORT, GND- Sound signal circuit malfunction between BOSE
amp. and rear side speaker RH.
SHORT or VB-SHOR) speaker amp. and rear side speaker RH.
Refer to AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[U1772]

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150454

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


1. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
2. Erase Self Diagnostic Result. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform Self Diagnostic Result again.
Is DTC U176A or U1772 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Refer to GI-47, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: September 2014 AV-362 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150455
B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".


C

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown. D

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


68 Ignition signal 29 (5A)
E

19 Battery power supply 15 (15A)


7 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
F
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M161 and M163.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connectors and ground.

AV control unit Voltage I


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

M163 68 Ignition switch: ON


J
7 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
M161
19 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 terminal 20 and ground.
M
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
AV
M161 20 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End. O
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
DISPLAY UNIT
P
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150456

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Revision: September 2014 AV-363 2015 Pathfinder
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


11 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
23 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
3. Check voltage between display connector M92 and ground.

Display unit Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

23 Ignition switch: ACC


M92 — Battery voltage
11 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between display unit connector M92 terminal 12 and ground.

Display unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M92 12 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150457

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


10 11 (15A)
Battery power supply
11 12 (15A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B129.
2. Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-364 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

BOSE speaker amp. Voltage A


Ground
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

10
B129 — Battery voltage B
11
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and ground.

BOSE speaker amp. E


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B129 — Yes F
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End. G
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
H
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150459

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram". I

1.CHECK FUSE J
Check that the following fuse is not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No. K


3 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
Is the fuse blown? L
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 3 and ground. AV

A/C and AV switch assembly Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.) O
M98 3 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164.
3. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 9 and AV control unit con-
nector M164 terminal 98.
Revision: September 2014 AV-365 2015 Pathfinder
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

A/C and AV switch assembly AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M98 9 M164 98 Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 terminal 1 and ground.

A/C and AV switch assembly


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M98 1 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150460

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


4 ACC power supply 65 (10A)
2 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect video distributor connector B24.
3. Check voltage between video distributor connector B24 and ground.

Video distributor Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

4 Ignition switch: ACC


B24 — Battery voltage
2 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between video distributor connector B24 and ground.

Revision: September 2014 AV-366 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Video distributor A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
B24 — Yes B
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End. C
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150461
D

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram". E

1.CHECK FUSE F
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No. G


15
Battery power supply 15 (15A)
16
H
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect headrest display unit connector.
2. Check voltage between headrest display unit connector and ground. J

Headrest displayl unit Voltage


Ground
Connector Terminal (Approx.) K
15
B223 (driver seat)
16
— Battery voltage L
15
B317 (passenger seat)
16
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT AV

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Check continuity between headrest display unit connector and ground. O

Revision: September 2014 AV-367 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Headrest displayl unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
12
B223 (driver seat) 31
32
— Yes
28
B317 (passenger seat) 31
32
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150462

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.


4 Ignition signal 29 (5A)
2 Battery power supply 15 (15A)
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit Voltage


Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)

4 Ignition switch: ON
M96 — Battery voltage
2 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 1 — Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.

Revision: September 2014 AV-368 2015 Pathfinder


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
A

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-369 2015 Pathfinder


CENTER SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CENTER SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150463

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and center speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and center speaker connector.

BOSE speaker amp. Center speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
17 1
B130 M110 Yes
18 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and ground.

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
17
B130 — No
18
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and center speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

BOSE speaker amp. connector B130


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

17 18 Audio signal output

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: September 2014 AV-370 2015 Pathfinder


CENTER SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-436, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. A
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
B
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity C
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 35
3 36 D
M161 B130 Yes
11 33
12 34
E
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit F
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3 G
M161 — No
11
12
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. J
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.
K
AV control unit connector M161
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
L
Terminal Terminal
2 3

Audio signal output


11 12
AV

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal? O


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-371 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150464

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector and suspect instrument panel tweeter connec-
tor.

BOSE speaker amp. Instrument panel tweeter


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
29 1
B130 M62 (LH)
30 2
Yes
4 1
B129 M73 (RH)
3 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector and ground.

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
29
B130
30
— No
4
B129
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and suspect instrument panel tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector.

BOSE speaker amp. connector


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-372 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
29 30
A

Audio signal output


4 3 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace instrument panel tweeter. Refer to AV-435, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130. E

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
2 35
3 36
M161 B130 Yes G
11 33
12 34
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground. H

AV control unit
Ground Continuity I
Connector Terminal
2
3 J
M161 — No
11
12
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. M
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.
AV
AV control unit connector M161
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal O
2 3

P
Audio signal output
11 12

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: September 2014 AV-373 2015 Pathfinder
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-374 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT TWEETER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150465

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front tweeter connector.
G
BOSE speaker amp. Front tweeter
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
19 1
M109 (LH)
20 2
B130 Yes
31 1 I
M111 (RH)
32 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and ground.
J

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
19
20
B130 — No L
31
32
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK FRONT TWEETER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 P


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-375 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
19 20

Audio signal output


31 32

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace front tweeter. Refer to AV-434, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 35
3 36
M161 B130 Yes
11 33
12 34
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M161 — No
11
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.

AV control unit connector M161


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
2 3

Audio signal output


11 12

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: September 2014 AV-376 2015 Pathfinder
FRONT TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-377 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150466

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front door speaker connec-
tor.

BOSE speaker amp. Front door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
19 1
D12 (LH)
20 2
B130 Yes
31 1
D112 (RH)
32 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and ground.

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
19
20
B130 — No
31
32
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B130 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

BOSE speaker amp. connector B130


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-378 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
19 20
A

Audio signal output


31 32 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-433, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130. E

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
2 35
3 36
M161 B130 Yes G
11 33
12 34
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground. H

AV control unit
Ground Continuity I
Connector Terminal
2
3 J
M161 — No
11
12
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. M
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.
AV
AV control unit connector M161
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal O
2 3

P
Audio signal output
11 12

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: September 2014 AV-379 2015 Pathfinder
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-380 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150467

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 or B130 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 or B130 and suspect rear door speaker
connector. G

BOSE speaker amp. Rear door speaker


Continuity H
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
28 1
B130 D207 (LH)
16 2
Yes I
14 1
B129 D307 (RH)
9 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 or B130 and ground. J

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity K
Connector Terminal
28
B130
16 L
— No
14
B129
9
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
AV
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 or B130 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. O
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connectors.
P
BOSE speaker amp. Condition Reference value
(+) (−)
Connector
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-381 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
B130 28 16

Audio signal output


B129 14 9

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-437, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 24
5 23
M161 B130 Yes
13 26
14 25
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M161 — No
13
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.

AV control unit connector M161


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
4 5

Audio signal output


13 14

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: September 2014 AV-382 2015 Pathfinder
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-383 2015 Pathfinder


REAR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150468

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR SIDE SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and suspect rear side speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and suspect rear side speaker connector.

BOSE speaker amp. Rear side speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B1 (LH)
1 1
B153 (RH)
B129 Yes
B1 (LH)
2 2
B153 (RH)
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and ground.

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
B129 — No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR SIDE SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 and suspect rear side speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B129.

Revision: September 2014 AV-384 2015 Pathfinder


REAR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

BOSE speaker amp. connector B129 Condition Reference value A


(+) (−)
Terminal Terminal
B

C
1 2 Audio signal output

D
SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace rear side speaker. Refer to AV-438, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

G
AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 24 H
5 23
M161 B130 Yes
13 26
14 25
I

3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.


J
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4 K
5
M161 — No
13
L
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. M
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161. O

AV control unit connector M161


(+) (−) Condition Reference value P
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-385 2015 Pathfinder


REAR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
4 5

Audio signal output


13 14

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-386 2015 Pathfinder


SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SUBWOOFER
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150469

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or looses terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
G
BOSE speaker amp. Subwoofer
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
H
8 1
13 2
B129 B73 Yes
6 3 I
5 4
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector and ground.
J

BOSE speaker amp.


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
8
13
B129 — No L
6
5
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK SUBWOOFER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector and subwoofer connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
4. Check the signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector.

BOSE speaker amp. connector P


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-387 2015 Pathfinder


SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
13 8

Audio signal output


5 6

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-439, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.

AV control unit BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 24
5 23
M161 B130 Yes
13 26
14 25
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M161 — No
13
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK PRE-AMP SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M161 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B130.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.

AV control unit connector M161


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
4 5

Audio signal output


13 14

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: September 2014 AV-388 2015 Pathfinder
SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-389 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150470

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M162 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
24 3
M162 M205 Yes
38 1
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
24
M162 — No
38
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and front auxiliary input jacks connector M205.

AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M162 39 M205 2 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK AUX SOUND SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M162 and front auxiliary input jacks connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Select AUX mode.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M162.

AV control unit connector M162 Condition Reference value


(+) (−)
Terminal Terminal

Revision: September 2014 AV-390 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUDIO SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
24 39
A

AUX mode selected


38 39 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace front auxiliary input jacks. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-391 2015 Pathfinder


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT DIS-
PLAY UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO FRONT
DISPLAY UNIT)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150471

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and display unit connector M92.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and display unit connector M92.

AV control unit Display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
56 18
M163 M92 Yes
55 19
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M163 56 — No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M163 and display unit connector M92.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M163.

AV control unit connector M163


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

56 55 DVD image is displayed.

SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-429, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-392 2015 Pathfinder


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO VIDEO DISTRIB-
UTOR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO VIDEO
A
DISTRIBUTOR)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150472
B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".


C

1.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164 and video distributor connector B25.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and video distributor connector B25.
E
AV control unit Video distributor
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
107 34
M164 B25 Yes
105 33
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and ground. G

AV control unit
Ground Continuity H
Connector Terminal
M164 107 — No
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect AV control unit connector M164 and video distributor connector B25.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of video distributor connector B25. K

Video distributor connector B25


L
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

DVD, USB or front auxiliary in-


34 33 put jacks image is displayed on A V
headrest display.

SKIB2251J
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace video distributor. Refer to AV-447, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". P

Revision: September 2014 AV-393 2015 Pathfinder


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO HEADREST
DISPLAY UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR TO HEAD-
REST DISPLAY UNIT)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150473

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.

Video distributor Headrest display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
32 5
B223 (driver seat) Yes
31 21
B24
28 5
B317 (passenger seat) Yes
27 21
4. Check continuity between video distributor connector B24 and ground.

Video distributor
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
32
B24 — No
28
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of headrest display unit connectors.

Headrest display unit


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal Terminal
B223 (driver seat) 5 21

DVD, USB or front


auxiliary input jacks
B317 (passenger image is displayed on
5 21
seat) headrest display.

SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace headrest display unit. Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace video distributor. Refer to AV-447, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-394 2015 Pathfinder


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS TO AV CON-
TROL UNIT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS TO AV
A
CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150474
B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".


C

1.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164 and front auxiliary input jacks connector M205.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and front auxiliary input jacks connector M205.
E
AV control unit Front auxiliary input jacks
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
91 7
M164 M205 Yes
92 8
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and ground. G

AV control unit
Ground Continuity H
Connector Terminal
M164 91 — No
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect AV control unit connector M164 and front auxiliary input jacks connector M205.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of front auxiliary input jacks connector M205. K

Front auxiliary input jacks connector M205


L
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Front auxiliary input jacks im-


7 8
age is displayed. A V

SKIB2251J
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace front auxiliary input jacks. Refer to AV-441, "Removal and Installation". P

Revision: September 2014 AV-395 2015 Pathfinder


IMAGE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
IMAGE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150475

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK CONTINUITY IMAGE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.

Video distributor Headrest display unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
10 7
B223 (driver seat)
7 23
B24 Yes
9 7
B317 (passenger seat)
5 23
4. Check continuity between video distributor connector B24 and ground.

Video distributor
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
10
B24 — No
9
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR VOLTAGE
1. Connect video distributor connector B24 and headrest display unit connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of video distributor connector B24.

Video distributor connector B24


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
DVD, USB or front auxiliary in-
put jacks image is displayed on 0.5 V
headrest display.
10 7
DVD, USB or rear auxiliary in-
put jacks image is displayed on 4.5 V
headrest display.
DVD, USB or front auxiliary in-
put jacks image is displayed on 0.5 V
headrest display.
9 5
DVD, USB or rear auxiliary in-
put jacks image is displayed on 4.5 V
headrest display.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace video distributor. Refer to AV-447, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace headrest display unit. Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-396 2015 Pathfinder


DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150476

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164 and A/C and AV switch assembly connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 terminal 97 and A/C and AV switch assembly
connector M98 terminal 14.
E
AV control unit A/C and AV switch assembly
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M164 97 M98 14 Yes F
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 terminal 97 and ground.

G
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M164 97 No H
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M164 and A/C and AV switch assembly connector. J
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M164 terminal 97 and ground.

K
AV control unit Ground
Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal L
Pressing eject switch 0V
M164 97 —
Except above 5.0 V
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace A/C and AV switch assembly. Refer to AV-427, "Removal and Installation".
AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-397 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150477

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and microphone connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and microphone connector R109.

AV control unit Microphone


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
59 5
M163 60 R109 3 Yes
75 6
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
59
M163 60 — No
75
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE VCC VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M163.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between terminals of AV control unit connector M163.

AV control unit connector M163


Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
60 59 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between terminals of AV control unit connector M163.

Revision: September 2014 AV-398 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV control unit connector M163 A


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
B

C
75 59 Speak into microphone.

D
SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-442, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-399 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150478

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCHES RESISTANCE


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check the resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M149.

Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω


Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)

Depress SOURCE switch. 1

Depress switch. 121

14 Depress switch. 321

Depress switch. 723

Depress ENTER switch. 2023


17
Depress switch. 1

Depress switch. 121

15 321
Depress switch.

Depress switch. 723

Depress DISP switch. 2023


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-428, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.

Combination meter Combination switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
3 24
M24 24 M30 33 Yes
4 31
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground.

Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
3
M24 24 — No
4
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: September 2014 AV-400 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. A
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
B

Combination switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
24 14
M30 31 M149 15 Yes
33 17
D

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161. F
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and AV control unit connector M161.

Combination meter AV control unit G


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
14 6
H
M24 15 M161 16 Yes
16 15
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground. I

Combination meter
Ground Continuity J
Connector Terminal
14
M24 15 — No K
16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. L
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE M
1. Connect combination meter connector M24 and AV control unit connector M161.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161.
AV

AV control unit M161


Voltage
(+) (−) O
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
6
15 5.0 V
16 P

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-85, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-401 2015 Pathfinder


USB CONNECTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
USB CONNECTOR
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150479

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M126 and USB interface connector M209.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M126 and USB interface connector M209.

AV control unit USB interface


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
121 2
122 1
M126 123 M209 4 Yes
124 3
125 5
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M126 and ground.

AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
121
M126 Ground No
123
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-440, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: September 2014 AV-402 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150480

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and front camera connector E226. D
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and front camera connector
E226.
E
Around view monitor control unit Front camera
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
40 3 F
M96 E226 Yes
39 4
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.
G

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
M96 40 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and front camera connector E226.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.
K

Around view monitor control unit connector M96


(+) (−) Condition Reference value L
Terminal Terminal

CAMERA switch is ON or shift


40 39
position is R.
AV

JSNIA0834GB

O
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-444, "Removal and Installation".
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-403 2015 Pathfinder


REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150481

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR


1.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connector D504.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connec-
tor D504.

Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
28 3
M96 D504 Yes
27 4
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 28 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and rear view camera connector D504.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Around view monitor control unit connector M96


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

CAMERA switch is ON or shift


28 27
position is R.

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-445, "Removal and Installation".

WITHOUT AROUND VIEW MONITOR


1.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and rear view camera connector D504.
Revision: September 2014 AV-404 2015 Pathfinder
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

AV control unit Rear view camera A


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M164 83 D504 1 Yes
B
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and ground.

AV control unit C
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M164 83 No
D
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
E
2.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and rear view camera connector D504.
F
AV control unit Rear view camera
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
G
M164 84 D504 2 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. H
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M164 and rear view camera connector. I
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M164 and ground. J

AV control unit Ground


Voltage K
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M164 83 — Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
L
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal and Installation". M
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect display unit connector M92 and rear view camera connector. AV
3. Check continuity between display unit connector M92 and rear view camera connector D504.

Display unit Rear view camera O


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M92 8 D504 3 Yes
P
4. Check continuity between display unit connector M92 and ground.

Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M92 8 No
Is inspection result normal?
Revision: September 2014 AV-405 2015 Pathfinder
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector M92 and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Shift the selector lever to “R”.
4. Check signal between display unit connector M92 and ground.

Display unit Ground


(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal

Camera image dis-


M92 8 —
played.

SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-429, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-445, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-406 2015 Pathfinder


SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150482

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28. D
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector
D28.
E
Around view monitor control unit LH side camera
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
32 5 F
M96 D28 Yes
31 17
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.
G

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
M96 32 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. I
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and LH side camera connector D28.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.
K

Around view monitor control unit connector M96


(+) (−) Condition Reference value L
Terminal Terminal

CAMERA switch is ON or shift


32 31
position is R.
A V

JSNIA0834GB

O
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".
P

Revision: September 2014 AV-407 2015 Pathfinder


SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011150483

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector
D128.

Around view monitor control unit RH side camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
36 5
M96 D128 Yes
35 17
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M96 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M96 36 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
2.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M96 and RH side camera connector D128.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of around view monitor control unit connector M96.

Around view monitor control unit connector M96


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

CAMERA switch is ON or shift


36 35
position is R.

JSNIA0834GB

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-443, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace RH side camera. Refer to AV-446, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-408 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000011150484
B

RELATED TO AUDIO
C
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit
Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-409 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-255, "Wiring Diagram".
• Bose amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-346, "Diagnosis Procedure".
No sound from all speakers.
• Bose speaker amp. power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-364, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between AV con-
trol unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
- AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door speak-
er).
- AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front tweeter).
- AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instrument panel
tweeter).
- AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center speaker).
- AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door speak-
er).
- AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear side speaker).
- AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure" (subwoofer).
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between Bose
speaker amp. and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door speak-
No sound comes out or the level of er).
the sound is low. Only a certain speaker (front door - AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front tweeter).
speaker LH, front door speaker RH, front - AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instrument panel
tweeter LH, front tweeter RH, instrument tweeter).
panel tweeter LH, instrument panel - AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center speaker).
tweeter RH, center speaker, rear door - AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door speak-
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear er).
side speaker LH, rear side speaker RH, - AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear side speaker).
subwoofer) does not output sound. - AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure" (subwoofer).
• Malfunction in speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-433, "Removal and Installation" (front door
speaker).
- AV-434, "Removal and Installation" (front tweeter).
- AV-435, "Removal and Installation" (instrument
panel tweeter).
- AV-436, "Removal and Installation" (center speak-
er).
- AV-437, "Removal and Installation" (rear door
speaker).
- AV-438, "Removal and Installation" (rear side
speaker).
- AV-439, "Removal and Installation" (subwoofer).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Re-
moval and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-410 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
A
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers. • Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Re- B
moval and Installation".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between AV con-
trol unit and Bose speaker amp.
C
Refer to:
- AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door speak-
er). D
- AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front tweeter).
- AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instrument panel
tweeter).
- AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center speaker). E
- AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door speak-
er).
- AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear side speaker).
- AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure" (subwoofer). F
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between Bose
speaker amp. and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-378, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door speak- G
er).
- AV-375, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front tweeter).
Noise comes out only from a certain - AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure" (instrument panel
H
speaker (front door speaker LH, front tweeter).
door speaker RH, front tweeter LH, front - AV-370, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center speaker).
Noise is mixed with audio.
tweeter RH, instrument panel tweeter - AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door speak-
LH, instrument panel tweeter RH, center er). I
speaker, rear door speaker LH, rear door - AV-384, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear side speaker).
speaker RH, rear side speaker LH, rear - AV-387, "Diagnosis Procedure" (subwoofer).
side speaker RH, subwoofer). • Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and J
looseness).
Refer to:
- AV-433, "Removal and Installation" (front door
speaker). K
- AV-434, "Removal and Installation" (front tweeter).
- AV-435, "Removal and Installation" (instrument
panel tweeter).
- AV-436, "Removal and Installation" (center speak- L
er).
- AV-437, "Removal and Installation" (rear door
speaker).
M
- AV-438, "Removal and Installation" (rear side
speaker).
- AV-439, "Removal and Installation" (subwoofer).
• Malfunction in AV control unit. AV
Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-432, "Re-
moval and Installation". O
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna
vehicle hits a bump or while driving over feeder.
bad roads) Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas". P
• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Any radio station cannot be received • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
or poor reception is caused even after Refer to AV-345, "Diagnosis Procedure".
No radio reception or poor recep-
moving to a service area with good re- • Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna
tion.
ception (e.g. a place with clear view feeder.
and no obstacles generating external Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas".
noises).

Revision: September 2014 AV-411 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder or AV con-
trol unit. Perform DTC diagnosis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT Refer to AV-226, "CONSULT Function".
self diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-226, "CONSULT Function". • Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna
feeder.
No satellite radio reception. Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas".
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT • Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna
self diagnosis result. feeder.
Refer to AV-226, "CONSULT Function". • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting nut.
Refer to AV-449, "Location of Antennas".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are
not indicative of an issue with the speak- Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker
er, usually something nearby the speak- NOSIS" in the appropriate interior trim section.
er is causing the buzz/rattle.

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


Does not recognize cellular phone
connection (no connection is dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
played on the display at the guide).
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot
be established.
Hands-free phone cannot be estab- Malfunction in AV control unit.
• Hands-free phone operation can be
lished. Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-425, "Removal
performed, however, voice between
each other cannot be heard during the and Installation".
conversation.
Check the “microphone speaker” in In-
The other party’s voice cannot be
spection & Adjustment Mode if sound is
heard by hands-free phone.
heard.

Originating sound is not heard by Sound operation function is normal.


the other party with hands-free Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
phone communication. Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-398, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• The voice recognition can be con-
trolled. Steering switch malfunction.
• Steering switch’s , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-428, "Removal
switch works, but does not and Installation".
work.
The system cannot be operated.
Steering switch’s , , , and Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
switches do not work. Refer to AV-400, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.


All steering switches do not work.
Refer to AV-400, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO NAVIGATION

Revision: September 2014 AV-412 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A


• Malfunction in hard disk drive (HDD).
Navigation malfunction. • Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
B
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Steering switches malfunction.
Navigation system is inoperative. Refer to AV-400, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Microphone signal circuit malfunction. C
Refer to AV-398, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Voice activated control malfunction.
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-400, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
RELATED TO AROUND VIEW MONITOR

Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location


E
Around view monitor control unit power supply and
Around view monitor control unit mal- ground circuits malfunction.
function. Refer to AV-368, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". F
Display does not switch to camera
AV communication circuits malfunction between
image when “CAMERA” switch is
AV communication circuits malfunction. around view monitor control unit and AV control unit.
pressed or selector lever is in R (re-
Refer to AV-252, "Reference Value". G
verse).
Camera image signal circuit (output) malfunction be-
Camera image signal circuit (output) tween around view monitor control unit and display
malfunction. unit.
H
Refer to AV-252, "Reference Value".
Camera image signal circuit (input) malfunction be-
tween camera and around view monitor control unit.
Refer to: I
Camera image signal circuit (input) mal-
• AV-403, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front camera).
function.
• AV-404, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear view camera).
Display switches to camera image • AV-407, "Diagnosis Procedure" (side camera LH).
• AV-408, "Diagnosis Procedure" (side camera RH). J
when “CAMERA” switch is pressed
or selector lever is in R (reverse), Camera communication circuits malfunction between
but all views are not displayed. camera and around view monitor control unit.
Refer to: K
Camera communication signal circuits
• AV-403, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front camera).
malfunction.
• AV-404, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear view camera).
• AV-407, "Diagnosis Procedure" (side camera LH).
• AV-408, "Diagnosis Procedure" (side camera RH). L
Camera image signal circuit (output) malfunction be-
Camera image signal circuit (output) tween around view monitor control unit and display
Camera image is rolling.
malfunction. unit. M
Refer to AV-252, "Reference Value".
Display does not switch to rear view Reverse signal circuit between BCM and around view
monitor even when selector lever is Reverse signal circuit malfunction. monitor control unit. AV
in R (reverse). Refer to AV-252, "Reference Value".
Predicted course line center position is malfunction-
Predicted course line display in front
ing.
view and rear view is malfunction- Steering angle sensor malfunction. O
Refer to AV-307, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE CEN-
ing.
TER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure".
Front camera power supply and ground circuits mal-
Front camera malfunction. function. P
Refer to AV-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Front view and front of birds-eye
view is not displayed. Front camera image signal circuit malfunction be-
Front camera image signal circuit mal- tween front camera and around view monitor control
function. unit.
Refer to AV-403, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Revision: September 2014 AV-413 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location
Rear view camera power supply and ground circuits
Rear view camera malfunction. malfunction.
Refer to AV-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Rear view and rear of birds-eye
view is not displayed. Rear view camera image signal circuit malfunction
Rear view camera image signal circuit between rear view camera and around view monitor
malfunction. control unit.
Refer to AV-404, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Side camera LH power supply and ground circuits
Side camera LH malfunction. malfunction.
Refer to AV-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Front-side and driver side of birds-
eye view is not displayed. Side camera LH image signal circuit malfunction be-
Side camera LH image signal circuit tween side camera LH and around view monitor con-
malfunction. trol unit.
Refer to AV-407, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Side camera RH power supply and ground circuits
Side camera RH malfunction. malfunction.
Refer to AV-348, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Front-side and passenger side of
birds-eye view is not displayed. Side camera RH image signal circuit malfunction be-
Side camera RH image signal circuit tween side camera RH and around view monitor con-
malfunction. trol unit.
Refer to AV-408, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Selector lever is in a position other
Vehicle speed signal malfunction between ABS actu-
than R (reverse) and front, rear,
ator and electric unit (control unit) and around view
front-side and Birds-Eye views are Vehicle speed signal malfunction.
monitor control unit.
displayed even as vehicle speed in-
Refer to LAN-21, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
creases.

RELATED TO REAR DISPLAY (HEADREST-MOUNTED)


Perform diagnosis of the Power supply and ground circuit before starting diagnosis by symptom. Refer to AV-
367, "HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".

Symptom Check item Possible malfunction location/Action to take

Use the touch button in Operate with the remote to see if videos can be
Video is not shown on the Video is shown.
front display to switch vid- switched.
headrest display unit
eo images on the head- Replace headrest display unit.
screen. Video is not shown.
rest display unit. Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".
Video is not shown on the • AV communication circuits between headrest dis-
headrest display unit Perform “AV Comm Diagnosis” within “On Board Diag- play unit (driver seat) and headrest display unit
(passenger seat). Head- nosis Function”. Refer to AV-216, "On Board Diagno- (passenger seat).
rest display unit (driver sis Function". • Replace headrest display unit. Refer to AV-430,
seat) is normal. "Removal and Installation".
• Check with a remote from the same vehicle fam-
• Check battery polarity. ily.
All keys inoperative.
• Replace battery. • Check infrared* of the luminescent part (LED) of
the remote.
Headrest display unit in-
operative with the re- • Check with a remote
mote. from the same vehicle
family. The function corresponding to the remote operation
Some keys inoperative.
• Check infrared* of the is not included (this is not a malfunction).
luminescent part (LED)
of the remote.
Switch from AUX mode to DVD mode and check
Video is not shown.
video.
Headrest display unit Adjust screen for image quality (this is not a mal-
Play a DVD. Screen is dark.
screen is black. function).
Replace headrest display unit.
Screen is black.
Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: September 2014 AV-414 2015 Pathfinder


MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptom Check item Possible malfunction location/Action to take
A
Video shown on headrest
If the symptom does not change, replace headrest
display unit screen be- Adjust the color settings using the display screen
display unit.
comes distorted or rolls menu items.
Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".
up/down B
Headrest display unit Replace headrest display unit.

screen is blue. Refer to AV-430, "Removal and Installation".
*: To check infrared, check light of the luminescent part (LED) C
through the lens of digital camera when operating the remote.

JSNIA4954ZZ F
RELATED TO HEADPHONES (HEADREST-MOUNTED)
G
Symptom Check item Possible malfunction location/Action to take
• Turn ON the headrest
display unit. H
Audio cannot be heard
• Switch the slide switch Audio cannot be heard. Check power supply of headphones.
from headphones.
on the left side of the
headphones.
I
Power is ON (power indi-
This is not a malfunction.
• Battery polarity. cator lamp: ON).
Headphones cannot be
• Battery poor contact. Power cannot be turned
turned ON.
• Battery replacement.
J
ON (power indicator Replace headphones.
lamp: OFF).

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-415 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000011150485

RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause

Occurrence condition Possible cause


A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

Symptom Cause and Counter measure

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized


Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-409, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

Revision: September 2014 AV-416 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
A
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or B
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

RELATED TO NAVIGATION C

Basic Operation
D
Symptom Cause Remedy
No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
E
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
F
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunction. G
on the screen. play unit).

Vehicle Mark
H
Symptom Cause Remedy
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some I
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data J
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition. K
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may L
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo- M
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation. AV
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis- O
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
P
ing the vehicle.

Revision: September 2014 AV-417 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Symptom Cause Remedy
Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year.

Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set

Symptom Cause Remedy


Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every conditions consid- System is not malfunctioning.
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system.

Voice Guide

Revision: September 2014 AV-418 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Symptom Cause Remedy A


Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
B
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
C
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. D
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road to
other roads.

Route Search E

Symptom Cause Remedy


No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near- F
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads. G
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the H
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to I
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning. J
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.) K
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended. L
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
M
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route AV
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can be happen due to omission or error in As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. the map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest O
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
P
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)

Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Revision: September 2014 AV-419 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.

SEL698V

Revision: September 2014 AV-420 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A
Y–intersections

At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-


sion of roads, an error in the direction of B
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
C
ELK0192D

Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
E
may deviate from the correct location.

ELK0193D

Straight roads
F
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
G
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner. H
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
not been restored, perform lo-
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
sary, direction correction.
When driving on a zigzag road, the map I
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location. J

ELK0195D

Roads laid out in a grid pattern K


When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and L
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location.
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads

When two roads are running in parallel


(such as highway and sideway), the map AV
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
O
ELK0197D

Revision: September 2014 AV-421 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)
In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu-
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V

Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads


where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform lo-
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
sary, direction correction.
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V

Map data Different road pattern


(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road.

ELK0201D

Drive the vehicle for a while. If


the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

Revision: September 2014 AV-422 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)
A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may B
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
Stop and adjust the orientation. C
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has D
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
E
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm. F
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
G
How to cor- SEL701V

rect location Direction when location is corrected


H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
I

SEL702V

Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow J


• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions K
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed L
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. M
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display. AV
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ. O
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on P
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

Revision: September 2014 AV-423 2015 Pathfinder


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location.
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure-
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.
RELATED TO SONAR

Symptom Possible cause


• The vehicle is on a rough surface, such as stone or gravel.
• When used in poor weather conditions, such as heavy snow/rain strong wind.
• When subjected to an ultrasonic noise generated from exhaust muffler or brakes.
• When left standing in the hot sun or in a cold climate.
Unstable object detection • When the surface of the sensor is frozen or covered with snow/dirt/moisture.
• When a retrofitted xenon lamp, lighted license plate, or harness is close to the sensor body or sen-
sor harness.
• When subjected to loop coil noises generated from a vehicle detector placed at an intersection or
coin parking area.
• Air-containing objects, such as cloth, cotton, glass wool, dust, and snow.
• Thin objects, such as rope, chain and wire.
• Smooth-faced objects placed in a slanting direction.
Object undetectable • Fast-moving small animals.
• A corner of an angular object.
NOTE:
If the sensor detection part is scratched, obstacles cannot be detected.

Revision: September 2014 AV-424 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150486
B

ALNIA1436ZZ K

1. AV control unit bracket (LH) 2. A/C auto amp. 3. AV control unit


4. AV control unit bracket (RH) L

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150487

M
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the
ignition switch OFF. AV
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform "READ CONFIGURATION" to save current vehicle specifi-
cation. Refer to AV-305, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List".
NOTE: O
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-95, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the screws, then pull out the AV control unit.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the AV control unit and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:

Revision: September 2014 AV-425 2015 Pathfinder


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-305, "CONFIGURA-
TION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List".

Revision: September 2014 AV-426 2015 Pathfinder


A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150488

REMOVAL B
1. Remove cluster lid C lower. Refer to IP-22, "CLUSTER LID C LOWER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the A/C and AV switch assembly lower screws.
C
3. Release upper pawls and remove A/C and AV switch assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-427 2015 Pathfinder


STEERING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
STEERING SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150489

ALOIA0025ZZ

1. Steering switches 2. Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel rear finisher

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150490

REMOVAL
NOTE:
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-45, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release pawls and remove steering wheel rear finisher (1) from
steering wheel (2).

ALOIA0026ZZ

3. Remove steering switches screws.


4. Remove steering switches (1) from steering wheel (2).

ALOIA0027ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-428 2015 Pathfinder


DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150491

J
ALNIA1429ZZ

1. Display unit 2. Display unit bracket A. Display unit bracket screws K

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150492

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the display unit screws, then pull out the display unit and bracket. M
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the display unit, then remove the display unit and bracket.
4. Remove the display unit brackets screws and the display unit from the display unit bracket.
AV
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O

Revision: September 2014 AV-429 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150493

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Do not press on the panel surface of display (glass area).
• Do not press or pull out the movable part of display.
1. Remove the headrest trim retainer (A).

JMJIA4069ZZ

2. Remove the headrest display harness and upper tube screws


(A), then remove headrest display unit bolts (B).

JMJIA4070ZZ

3. Remove the headrest display escutcheon and headrest display.


a. Insert a suitable tool (A) between lower side of headrest display
escutcheon (1) and headrest trim (2) and pull out lower side of
escutcheon.

JMJIA4071ZZ

b. Pull out headrest display escutcheon (1) to the position that pawl
is visible and disengage pawl.
: Pawl

AWNIA2554ZZ

c. Pull out lower side of headrest display escutcheon from headrest.

Revision: September 2014 AV-430 2015 Pathfinder


HEADREST DISPLAY UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage pawls on upper side headrest display escutcheon. A
d. Pull downward and remove headrest display escutcheon (1) and
headrest display unit (2) by pulling them out and removing pins
on upper side of display. B

D
JMJIA4233ZZ

e. Disconnect inner harness connector. E


f. Press headrest display escutcheon to the headrest display unit side. Disconnect pawls on upper side and
remove headrest display escutcheon.
4. Remove the headrest display harness upper tube from headrest trim. F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-431 2015 Pathfinder


BOSE SPEAKER AMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150494

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-95, "Removal and Installation"
2. Remove third row seat. Refer to SE-113, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove Bose speaker amp screws (A).
4. Disconnect the harness connectors (B) from the Bose speaker
amp. and remove.

ALNIA0918ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-432 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150495

ALNIA1329ZZ

G
1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Front door speaker 3. Speaker bolt
4. Speaker bracket

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150496


H

REMOVAL
I
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker bolts.
3. Pull out the front door speaker from the speaker bracket. J
4. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
5. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from front door (if necessary).
INSTALLATION K
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-433 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT TWEETER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150497

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher (1). Refer to INT-19, "FRONT
PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
2. Remove the two screws and the front tweeter (2).

JSNIA3786ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-434 2015 Pathfinder


INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER/TWEETER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150498

REMOVAL B
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the bolts (A), then pull out the instrument panel tweeter
(1). C
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the instrument panel
tweeter (1) and remove.
D

ALNIA1423ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-435 2015 Pathfinder


CENTER SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150499

REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the center speaker bolts (A).
3. Pull out the center speaker (1).
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the center speaker and
remove.

ALNIA1196ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-436 2015 Pathfinder


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150500

G
ALNIA1330ZZ

1. Speaker bracket bolt 2. Rear door speaker 3. Speaker bolt


4. Speaker bracket
H

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150501

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker bolts. J
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker and remove.
4. Remove the speaker bracket bolts and the speaker bracket from the rear door (if necessary).
K
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
L

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-437 2015 Pathfinder


REAR SPEAKERS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR SPEAKERS
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150502

REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-31, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear side speaker screws (A), then remove the rear
side and grille assembly (1) from the luggage side lower finisher.
3. Remove the screws (B) from the rear side speaker grille, then
remove the rear side speaker (2).

ALNIA1428ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-438 2015 Pathfinder


SUBWOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SUBWOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150503

ALNIA1328ZZ

G
1. Spare tire clamp 2. Subwoofer 3. Harness
4. Bracket 5. Rear storage box

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150504


H

REMOVAL
I
1. Open the storage box lid.
2. Remove the spare tire clamp.
3. Lift subwoofer to disconnect the harness connector and remove. J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
K

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-439 2015 Pathfinder


USB INTERFACE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
USB INTERFACE
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150505

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-18, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the USB interface.
3. Release the pawl from the back of USB interface, then remove USB interface.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-440 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150506

REMOVAL B
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-18, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the front auxiliary input jack.
C
3. Remove front auxiliary input jack screws and the front auxiliary input jack.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-441 2015 Pathfinder


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150507

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front room/map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-59, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the microphone (1) from the front room/map lamp
assembly.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging.

AWNIA2584ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Make sure the microphone is firmly secure after installation.

Revision: September 2014 AV-442 2015 Pathfinder


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011150508

ALNIA1332ZZ

G
1. Bracket 2. Around view monitor control unit 3. Screw

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150509


H
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation".
I
2. Remove the around view monitor control unit screws.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from around view monitor control unit and remove.
INSTALLATION J
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-443 2015 Pathfinder


FRONT CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
FRONT CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150510

REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release the emblem pawls and remove.
: Pawl
3. Remove the front camera screws (A) and the front camera (1)
from the front grille.

ALNIA1426ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-444 2015 Pathfinder


REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150511

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-43, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear view camera screws (A), then remove rear view
camera (1) from the back door outer finisher (2). C

ALNIA1427ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-445 2015 Pathfinder


SIDE CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SIDE CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150512

REMOVAL
1. Remove the door mirror. Refer to MIR-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the door mirror rear finisher. Refer to MIR-19, "Removal and Installation".
3. Release the side camera finisher pawls using a suitable tool,
disconnect the harness connector from the side camera, then
remove the side camera finisher.
: Pawl

ALLIA1121ZZ

4. Remove the screws (1) and the side camera (2).

AWNIA2558ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-446 2015 Pathfinder


VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
VIDEO DISTRIBUTOR
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150513

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-31, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the video distributor harness connectors (A). C
3. Remove the video distributor nut (2) and bolts (4).
4. Remove the video distributor (3) and brackets (1, 5) from the
vehicle as a single unit. D
5. Remove screws (B, C), then remove video distributor (3).

AWNIA3156ZZ
F

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-447 2015 Pathfinder


REAR AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
REAR AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150514

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear center ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-12, "REAR CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove rear auxiliary input jack screws and the rear auxiliary input jack.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: September 2014 AV-448 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
AUDIO ANTENNA
A
Location of Antennas INFOID:0000000011150515

I
AWNIA2589ZZ

1. Antenna base (satellite antenna and antenna 2. M502 3. M501 J


amp)
4. M503, M504 5. M505 6. Antenna Feeder
7. M95, M151, M500, M509 8. AV control unit M155, M156
K
Window Antenna Repair INFOID:0000000011150516

ELEMENT CHECK L

1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on


each side.
M

AV

SEL250I

Revision: September 2014 AV-449 2015 Pathfinder


AUDIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
• When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of
probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger.

SEL122R

2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.

SEL252I

3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication


will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.

SEL253I

Revision: September 2014 AV-450 2015 Pathfinder


GPS ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
GPS ANTENNA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150517

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-85, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from AV control unit.
C
3. Release the harness feeder clips.
4. Remove GPS antenna screw and the GPS antenna (1).
D

AWNIA2586ZZ

INSTALLATION G
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: September 2014 AV-451 2015 Pathfinder


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [PREMIUM AUDIO]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011150518

REMOVAL
1. Lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect harness connector from antenna feeder.
3. Remove nut from satellite antenna (1) and remove.
: Front

AWNIA2587ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
If the satellite antenna nut is not tightened to the specified torque, lower sensitivity of the antenna may
be experienced. If the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000011150519

DISASSEMBLY
Insert a suitable tool into gaps between satellite antenna (2) and the
cover (1), then remove the cover (1) from satellite antenna (2).

ALNIA1335ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Revision: September 2014 AV-452 2015 Pathfinder

You might also like